DL05/06 Option Modules USER MANUAL. Manual Number: D0-OPTIONS-M

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "DL05/06 Option Modules USER MANUAL. Manual Number: D0-OPTIONS-M"

Transcription

1 L0/0 Option Modules USER MNUL Manual Number: 0-OPTIONS-M

2 WRNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from utomationdirect.com, doing business as utomationirect. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. nyone who installs or uses this equipment should read this publication (and any other relevant publications) before installing or operating the equipment. To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area and usually change with time. It is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and to verify that the equipment, installation, and operation is in compliance with the latest revision of these codes. t a minimum, you should follow all applicable sections of the National Fire ode, National Electrical ode, and the codes of the National Electrical Manufacturer's ssociation (NEM). There may be local regulatory or government offices that can also help determine which codes and standards are necessary for safe installation and operation. Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable codes and standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for your particular application, nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation, or operation. Our products are not fault-tolerant and are not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the product could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage ("High Risk ctivities"). utomationirect specifically disclaims any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk ctivities. For additional warranty and safety information, see the Terms and onditions section of our catalog. If you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need additional information, please call us at This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. t utomationirect we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without any obligation. This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of the product. Trademarks This publication may contain references to products produced and/or offered by other companies. The product and company names may be trademarked and are the sole property of their respective owners. utomationirect disclaims any proprietary interest in the marks and names of others. opyright 00, utomationdirect.com Incorporated ll Rights Reserved No part of this manual shall be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any way without the prior, written consent of utomationdirect.com Incorporated. utomationirect retains the exclusive rights to all information included in this document.

3 VERTISSEMENT Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté l'équipement d'automatisation de utomationdirect.com, en faisant des affaires comme utomationirect. Nous tenons à ce que votre nouvel équipement d'automatisation fonctionne en toute sécurité. Toute personne qui installe ou utilise cet équipement doit lire la présente publication (et toutes les autres publications pertinentes) avant de l'installer ou de l'utiliser. fin de réduire au minimum le risque d'éventuels problèmes de sécurité, vous devez respecter tous les codes locaux et nationaux applicables régissant l'installation et le fonctionnement de votre équipement. es codes diffèrent d'une région à l'autre et, habituellement, évoluent au fil du temps. Il vous incombe de déterminer les codes à respecter et de vous assurer que l'équipement, l'installation et le fonctionnement sont conformes aux exigences de la version la plus récente de ces codes. Vous devez, à tout le moins, respecter toutes les sections applicables du ode national de prévention des incendies, du ode national de l'électricité et des codes de la National Electrical Manufacturer's ssociation (NEM). es organismes de réglementation ou des services gouvernementaux locaux peuvent également vous aider à déterminer les codes ainsi que les normes à respecter pour assurer une installation et un fonctionnement sûrs. L'omission de respecter la totalité des codes et des normes applicables peut entraîner des dommages à l'équipement ou causer de graves blessures au personnel. Nous ne garantissons pas que les produits décrits dans cette publication conviennent à votre application particulière et nous n'assumons aucune responsabilité à l'égard de la conception, de l'installation ou du fonctionnement de votre produit. Nos produits ne sont pas insensibles aux défaillances et ne sont ni conçus ni fabriqués pour l'utilisation ou la revente en tant qu'équipement de commande en ligne dans des environnements dangereux nécessitant une sécurité absolue, par exemple, l'exploitation d'installations nucléaires, les systèmes de navigation aérienne ou de communication, le contrôle de la circulation aérienne, les équipements de survie ou les systèmes d'armes, pour lesquels la défaillance du produit peut provoquer la mort, des blessures corporelles ou de graves dommages matériels ou environnementaux («activités à risque élevé»). La société utomationirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite d'aptitude à l'emploi en ce qui a trait aux activités à risque élevé. Pour des renseignements additionnels touchant la garantie et la sécurité, veuillez consulter la section Modalités et conditions de notre documentation. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de l'installation ou du fonctionnement de cet équipement, ou encore si vous avez besoin de renseignements supplémentaires, n'hésitez pas à nous téléphoner au ette publication s'appuie sur l'information qui était disponible au moment de l'impression. À la société utomationirect, nous nous efforçons constamment d'améliorer nos produits et services. 'est pourquoi nous nous réservons le droit d'apporter des modifications aux produits ou aux publications en tout temps, sans préavis ni quelque obligation que ce soit. La présente publication peut aussi porter sur des caractéristiques susceptibles de ne pas être offertes dans certaines versions révisées du produit. Marques de commerce La présente publication peut contenir des références à des produits fabriqués ou offerts par d'autres entreprises. Les désignations des produits et des entreprises peuvent être des marques de commerce et appartiennent exclusivement à leurs propriétaires respectifs. utomationirect nie tout intérêt dans les autres marques et désignations. opyright 00, utomationdirect.com Incorporated Tous droits réservés Nulle partie de ce manuel ne doit être copiée, reproduite ou transmise de quelque façon que ce soit sans le consentement préalable écrit de la société utomationdirect.com Incorporated. utomationirect conserve les droits exclusifs à l'égard de tous les renseignements contenus dans le présent document.

4 L0/0 OPTION MOULES USER MNUL Please include the Manual Number and the Manual Issue, both shown below, when communicating with Technical Support regarding this publication. Manual Number: 0-OPTIONS-M Issue: th Edition Issue ate: 0/0 Publication History Issue ate escription of hanges Original 0/0 original issue Rev. /0 made changes to analog specifications nd edition 0/0 added new chapter and minor changes to chapters rd edition 0/0 added wiring guidelines and new discrete module th edition 0/0 added L0 micro PL information th edition Rev. 0/0 minor changes and corrections th edition 0/0 added new chapter th edition 0/0 added one new chapter and reference new discrete module th edition Rev. 0/0 added one new chapter th edition Rev. 0/0 added two new discrete modules, moved 0-0M Memory artridge/real Time lock module to L0 user manual th edition Rev. 0/0 added F0-0SIM module; minor corrections th edition 0/0 added six new chapters for high resolution analog modules

5 TLE OF ONTENTS hapter : Getting Started Introduction The Purpose of this Manual Supplemental Manuals Technical Support onventions Used Key Topics for Each hapter Selecting the Proper Module L L Module hoices Installing the Option Modules Remove the Slot over Insert the Module Power udgeting Power supplied Power required by base unit Power required by option cards hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines Safety Guidelines Plan for Safety Three Levels of Protection Emergency Stops Emergency Power isconnect Orderly System Shutdown lass, ivision pproval (pplies ONLY to modules used with a L0 PL.)...

6 Table of ontents System Wiring Strategies PL Isolation oundaries Sinking/Sourcing oncepts I/O ommon Terminal oncepts onnecting I/O to Solid State Field evices Solid State Input Sensors Solid State Output Loads Relay Output Guidelines Prolonging Relay ontact Life Surge Suppression For Inductive Loads Prolonging Relay ontact Life Input Wiring Methods Output Wiring Methods Firmware and Software I/O ddressing Module I/O Points and ddressing for the L0 and L iscrete and nalog Modules Installed I/O ddressing Example: iscrete and nalog Modules Installed I/O ddressing Example: ll iscrete Modules Installed I/O ddressing Example: iscrete I/O General Specifications Glossary of Specification Terms F0-0SIM-Point Simulator Input Module N0-Point Input Module NF0-Point Fast Input Module N-Point Input Module F0-0N--Point Input Module T0-Point Output Module T-Point Output Module T0-Point Output Module T-Point Output Module R-Point Input and -Point Relay Output Module TR-Point Relay Output Module Point Input and -Point Output Module F0-0TRS-Point Relay Output Module ii L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

7 Table of ontents hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumper onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Wiring iagram urrent Loop Transmitter Impedance Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence nalog Module Updates Special V-memory Locations Formatting the Module ata L0 ata Formatting Structure of V Structure of V L0 ata Formatting Setup ata Type and Number of hannels Storage Pointer Setup Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method L0 Pointer Method etecting Input Signal Loss nalog Signal Loss Scale onversions Scaling the Input ata The onversion Program nalog and igital Value onversions Special Relays L0 Special Relays L0 SpecialRelays Module Resolution nalog ata its Resolution etails L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 iii

8 Table of ontents nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): Using inary ata Format Using ata Format hapter : F0-0H- -h.nalog urrent Input Module Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Wiring iagram urrent Loop Transmitter Impedance Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence nalog Module Updates Special V-memory Locations Formatting the nalog Module ata L0 ata Formatting Setup ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Storage Pointer Setup L0 ata Formatting Setup ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Storage Pointer Setup Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft Scale onversions Scaling the Input ata The onversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic nalog and igital Value onversions iv L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

9 Table of ontents Module Resolution nalog ata its Resolution etails nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): inary ata Format Filter Using Ladder Logic ata Format Filter Using Ladder Logic Example ode to Scale a 0m Signal to Example ode to Scale a 0m Signal to inary hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumpers onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Wiring iagram Module Operation Input hannel Update Sequence nalog Module Updates Special V-memory Locations Formatting the Module ata L0 ata Formatting Structure of V Structure of V L0 ata Formatting Setup ata Type and Number of hannels Storage Pointer Setup Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method L0 Pointer Method L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 v

10 Table of ontents Scale onversions Scaling the Input ata The onversion Program nalog and igital Value onversions Module Resolution nalog ata its Resolution etails nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): Using inary ata Format Using ata Format hapter : F0-0H- -h.nalog Voltage Input Module Specifications Locating the jumpers Setting the appropriate jumper Setting the Module Jumpers onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Wiring iagram Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence nalog Module Updates Special V-memory Locations Formatting the nalog Module ata L0 ata Formatting Setup ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Storage Pointer Setup L0 ata Formatting Setup ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Storage Pointer Setup vi L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

11 Table of ontents Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft Scale onversions Scaling the Input ata The onversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic nalog and igital Value onversions Module Resolution nalog ata its Resolution etails nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): inary ata Format Filter Using Ladder Logic Using ata Format hapter : F0-0H- -h.nalog urrent Output Module Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Wiring iagram Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence Special V-memory Locations Formatting the nalog Module ata L0 ata Formatting ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup Storage Pointer Setup L0 ata Formatting ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup Storage Pointer Setup L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 vii

12 Table of ontents Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft Output Scale onversion alculating the igital Output Value The onversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic nalog and igital Value onversions Module Resolution nalog ata its Resolution etails hapter : F0-0H- -h.nalog urrent Output Module Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Wiring iagram Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence Special System V-memory Locations Formatting the nalog Module ata L0 ata Formatting ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup Storage Pointer Setup L0 ata Formatting ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup Storage Pointer Setup Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft viii L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

13 Table of ontents Output Scale onversion alculating the igital Output Value The onversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic nalog and igital Value onversions Module Resolution nalog ata its Resolution etails hapter : F0-0H- -h.nalog Voltage Output Module Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Wiring iagram Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence Special V-memory Locations Formatting the nalog Module ata L0 ata Formatting ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup Storage Pointer Setup L0 ata Formatting ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup Storage Pointer Setup Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft Output Scale onversion alculating the igital Output Value The onversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic nalog and igital Value onversions L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 ix

14 Table of ontents Module Resolution nalog ata its Resolution etails hapter 0: F0-0H- -h.nalog Voltage Output Module Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Wiring iagram Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence Special V-memory Locations Formatting the nalog Module ata L0 ata Formatting ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup Storage Pointer Setup L0 ata Formatting ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup Storage Pointer Setup Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft Output Scale onversion alculating the igital Output Value The onversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic nalog and igital Value onversions Module Resolution nalog ata its Resolution etails x L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

15 Table of ontents hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumper onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Wiring iagram Module Operation Input/Output hannel Update Sequence nalog Module Updates Special V-memory Locations Formatting themodule ata L0 ata Formatting Structure of V Structure of V Structure of V L0 ata Formatting Setup ata Type and Number of hannels Input Storage Pointer Setup Output Storage Pointer Setup Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method L0 Pointer Method Scale onversions Scaling the Input ata The onversion Program Output onversion Program nalog and igital Value onversions Module Resolution nalog ata its Resolution etails L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 xi

16 Table of ontents xii nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): Using inary ata Format Using ata Format hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumpers onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Wiring iagram Module Operation Input/Output hannel Scanning Sequence nalog Module Updates Special V-memory Locations Formatting the Module ata L0 ata Formatting Structure of V Structure of V Structure of V L0 ata Formatting Setup ata Type and Number of hannels Input Storage Pointer Output Storage Pointer Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method L0 Pointer Method Scale onversions Scaling the Input ata The onversion Program Output onversion Program nalog and igital Value onversions L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

17 Table of ontents Module Resolution nalog ata its nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): Using inary ata Format Using ata Format hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumpers onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Wiring iagram Module Operation Input/Output hannel Update Sequence nalog Module Updates Special V-memory Locations Formatting the Module ata L0 ata Formatting Structure of V Structure of V Structure of V L0 ata Formatting Setup ata Type and Number of hannels Input Storage Pointer Setup Output Storage Pointer Setup Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method L0 Pointer Method L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 xiii

18 Table of ontents Scale onversions Scaling the Input ata The onversion Program Output onversion Program nalog and igital Value onversions Module Resolution nalog ata its Resolution etails nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): Using inary ata Format Using ata Format hapter : F0-0RT -hannelrt Input Module Specifications Module alibration Input Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines RT - Resistance Temperature etector mbient Variations in Temperature Wiring iagram Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence nalog Module Update Special V-memory Locations Module onfiguration Registers : Number of hannels Enabled/ata Format Register : Input Pointer Register : RT Type Selection Register : Units ode Register E: RT urnout ata Value Register F: iagnostics Error Register xiv L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

19 Table of ontents onfiguring the Module in Your ontrol Program L0 Example L0 Example L0 Example L0 Example Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign Magnitude Plus Sign (inary) Magnitude Plus Sign () Negative Temperatures s omplement (inary/pointer Method) nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): Using inary ata Format Using ata Format RT urnout etection its Special Relays orresponding to RT urnouts hapter : F0-0THM -hannel Thermocouple Input Module Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Thermocouple Input Wiring iagram Thermocouples mbient Variations in Temperature Voltage Input Wiring iagram Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence nalog Module Update L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 xv

20 Table of ontents Special V-memory Locations Module onfiguration Registers : Number of hannels Enabled/ata Format Register : Input Pointer Register : Input Type Selection Register : Units ode Register E: Thermocouple urnout etection Enable Register F: Thermocouple urnout ata Value Register G: iagnostics Error Register onfiguring the Module in Your ontrol Program L0 Example L0 Example L0 Example L0 Example Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign Magnitude Plus Sign (inary) Magnitude Plus Sign () Module Resolution Module Resolution -it (Unipolar Voltage Input) Module Resolution -it Plus Sign (ipolar Voltage Input) nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): Using inary ata Format Using ata Format Thermocouple urnout etection its Special Relays orresponding to Thermocouple urnouts xvi L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

21 GETTING STRTE HPTER In This hapter... Introduction onventions Used Selecting the Proper Module Installing the Option Modules Power udgeting

22 hapter : Getting Started 0 Introduction The Purpose of this Manual This manual will discribe the option modules that are available for the L0 and L0 micro PL families. It will show you how to select and install an option module for your PL. Supplemental Manuals You will either need a copy of the L0 User Manual (0 USER M) or the L0 User Manual (0 0USER M) at hand when incorporating any one of the option modules in your PL. Technical Support We strive to make our manuals the best in the industry. We rely on your feedback to let us know if we are reaching our goal. If you cannot find the solution to your particular application, or, if for any reason you need technical assistance, please call us at: 0 00 Our technical support group will work with you to answer your questions. They are available Monday through Friday from :00.M. to :00 P.M. Eastern Time. We also encourage you to visit our web site where you can find technical and non-technical information about our products and our company. If you have a comment, question or suggestion about any of our products, services, or manuals, please fill out and return the Suggestions card that was included with this manual. onventions Used When you see the notepad icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right will be a special note. The word NOTE: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text. When you see the exclamation mark icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right will be a warning. This information could prevent injury, loss of property, or even death (in extreme cases). The word WRNING: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text. Key Topics for Each hapter The beginning of each chapter will list the key topics that can be found in that chapter. Getting Started In This hapter... HPTER General Information...- Specifications...- L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

23 RUN PU TX RX TX RX hapter : Getting Started Selecting the Proper Module L0 The L0 Micro PL only has one option slot to install an option module. The proper selection of a module is dependent on the control application. L0 The L0 Micro PL has four option slots. The option modules can also be added according to the control application. Module hoices There are over thirty option modules available. The specifications and wiring diagrams for the discrete I/O modules can be found in the next chapter. full description of the analog modules can be found in their respective chapters in this manual. The memory cartridge module, 0-0M, can be found in the L0 Micro PL User Manual. The communications and specialty modules are described in their respective user manuals, see user manual p/n reference below. The following table lists the modules available. Part Number F0-0SIM 0-0N 0-0NF 0-N F0-0N- 0-0T 0-T 0-0T 0-T 0-0R 0-0TR 0-0 F0-0TRS iscrete Modules escription point Simulator Input 0 point Input 0 point fast Input point Input point Input 0 point Output (sinking) point Output (sinking) 0 point Output (sourcing) point Output (sourcing) point Input, point Relay Output point Relay Output point Input, point Output (sinking) point High urrent Relay Output nalog and Specialty module choices can be found on the next page. PWR 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

24 hapter : Getting Started 0 Module hoices, continued. nalog Modules Part Number escription F0-0- -hannel nalog Input, urrent F0-0H- -hannel High-Resolution nalog Input, urrent F0-0- -hannel nalog Input, Voltage F0-0H- -hannel High-Resolution nalog Input, Voltage F0-0H- -hannel High-Resolution nalog Output, urrent F0-0H- -hannel High-Resolution nalog Output, urrent F0-0H- -hannel High-Resolution nalog Output, Voltage F0-0H- -hannel High-Resolution nalog Output, Voltage F0-- -hannel Input/-hannel Output nalog ombination, urrent F0-- -hannel Input/-hannel Output nalog ombination, Voltage F0-- -hannel Input/-hannel Output nalog ombination, Voltage F0-0RT -hannel RT Input F0-0THM -hannel Thermocouple Input Specialty Modules Part Number escription 0-0M Memory artridge/real Time lock (L0 only) (see User Manual p/n 0-USER-M) 0-M ata ommunications Module 0-EVNETS evicenet Slave (User Manual p/n 0-EVNETS-M) H0-EOM(00) 0ase-T (0/00ase-T) Ethernet Network (User Manaul p/n HX-EOM-M) H0-PSM Profibus Slave ommunications (User Manual p/n HX-PSM-M) H0-TRIO High Speed ounter Interface (User Manual p/n HX-TRIO-M) F0-P Triple Port asic oprocessor (User Manual p/n F0-P-M) L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

25 hapter : Getting Started Installing the Option Modules efore installing the option module in the L0 option slot or the L0 option slots set the necessary jumpers and/or dip switches on the module. Refer to the chapter(s) that pertains to the module(s) being installed. Remove the Slot over The first step in installing the option module is to remove the protective option slot cover. Remove the cover by squeezing the pinch tabs and lifting the cover off. 0 X0 Option Module Slot overs G LG 0V Y0 Y Y Y Y0 Y Y Y (L) (N) V 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N.. PUT: 0V 0 0Hz.0, V.0 PWR: 00 0V 0 0Hz0V Y X INPUT: V m 0 0R X X X X X X X X X X N.. X0 X X X X0 X X X X N.. Pinch Tabs Insert the Module Now, insert the module into the open slot. Locate the module so the printed information is oriented in the same direction as the markings on the PL. e careful to align the female connector on the printed circuit board of the module with the male connector on the PL mother board. Press the module into the slot until the front of the module is flush with the front of the PL. Install the remaining modules in the L0. Once the modules are in place the PL is ready to be programmed. WRNING: Power to the PLs must be disconnected before inserting or removing a module. Failure to disconnect power could result in serious damage to a module, the PL or both. PORT PORT TERM PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX RUN STOP 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

26 hapter : Getting Started 0 Power udgeting The L0 has four option card slots. To determine whether the combination of cards you select will have sufficient power, you will need to perform a power budget calculation. Power supplied Power is supplied from two sources, the internal base unit power supply and, if required, an external supply (customer furnished). The 0-0xx ( powered) PLs supply a limited amount of V power. The V output can be used to power external devices. For power budgeting, start by considering the power supplied by the base unit. ll L0 PLs supply the same amount of V power. Only the units offer V auxiliary power. e aware of the trade-off between V power and V power. The amount of V power available depends on the amount of V power being used, and the amount of V power available depends on the amount of V power consumed. etermine the amount of internally supplied power from the table on the following page. Power required by base unit ecause of the different I/O configurations available in the L0 family, the power consumed by the base unit itself varies from model to model. Subtract the amount of power required by the base unit from the amount of power supplied by the base unit. e sure to subtract V and V amounts. Power required by option cards Next, subtract the amount of power required by the option cards you are planning to use. gain, remember to subtract both V and V. If your power budget analysis shows surplus power available, you should have a workable configuration. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

27 hapter : Getting Started L0 Power Supplied by ase Units Part Number V (m) V (m) <00m 00m 0-0xx <000m 00m 0-0xx- 00m none L0/0 Power onsumed by Option ards Part Number V (m) V (m) 0-0R 0m none m none 0-0TR 0m none 0-0N m none 0-0NF m none 0-0T 0m none 0-0T 0m none 0-N m none 0-T 00m none 0-T 00m none F0-0TRS 0m none F0-0N- m none F0-0- 0m none F0-0- m none F0-- 0m 0m F0-- 00m 0m F0-- 00m none F0-0RT 0m none F0-0THM 0m none F0-0SIM m none F0-0H- m m F0-0H- m m F0-0H- m 0m F0-0H- m 0m F0-0H- m m F0-0H- m m 0-0M used only in L0 0-M 0m none 0-EVNETS m none H0-PSM 0m none H0-EOM 0m none H0-EOM00 00m none H0-TRIO 0m none F0-P 0m none L0 ase Unit Power Required Part Number V (m) V (m) m none 0-0R 00m none m none m 0m* m none 0-0R 0m none m 0m* m none 0-0R- 0m none * uxiliary V used to power V+ terminal of 0-0/- sinking outputs. L0 Power onsumed by Other evices Part Number V (m) V (m) 0-0L 0m none -HPP 00m none V000 0m none Power udgeting Example V power (m) Power Source 0-0 (select row or row ) 00m 00m V power (m) 000m 00m urrent Required V power (m) m 0m* 0-N m 0 0-0T 0m 0 0-0TR 0m 0 F0-- 00m 0 0-0L 0m 0 Total Used m 0m Remaining m 0m m note V power (m) Note : If the PL s auxiliary V power source is used to power the sinking outputs, use power choice, above. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

28 ISRETE I/O GUIELINES HPTER In This hapter... Safety Guidelines System Wiring Strategies I/O ddressing iscrete I/O General Specifications Glossary of Specification Terms F0-0SIM - -Point Simulator Input Module N - 0-Point Input Module NF - 0-Point Fast Input Module N - -Point Input Module F0-0N- - -Point Input Module T - 0-Point Output Module T - -Point Output Module T - 0-Point Output Module T - -Point Output Module R - -Point Input and -Point Relay Output Module TR - -Point Relay Output Module Point Input and -Point Output Module F0-0TRS - -Point Relay Output Module

29 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 Safety Guidelines NOTE: Products with E marks perform their required functions safely and adhere to relevant standards as specified by E directives provided they are used according to their intended purpose and that the instructions in this manual are adhered to. The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired if this equipment is used in a manner not specified in this manual. listing of our international affiliates is available on our Web site: WRNING: Providing a safe operating environment for personnel and equipment is your responsibility and should be your primary goal during system planning and installation. utomation systems can fail and may result in situations that can cause serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment. o not rely on the automation system alone to provide a safe operating environment. You should use external electromechanical devices, such as relays or limit switches, that are independent of the PL application to provide protection for any part of the system that may cause personal injury or damage. Every automation application is different, so there may be special requirements for your particular application. Make sure you follow all national, state, and local government requirements for the proper installation and use of your equipment. Plan for Safety The best way to provide a safe operating environment is to make personnel and equipment safety part of the planning process. You should examine every aspect of the system to determine which areas are critical to operator or machine safety. If you are not familiar with PL system installation practices, or your company does not have established installation guidelines, you should obtain additional information from the following sources. NEM The National Electrical Manufacturers ssociation, located in Washington,.. publishes many different documents that discuss standards for industrial control systems. You can order these publications directly from NEM. Some of these include: IS, General Standards for Industrial ontrol and Systems IS, Industrial Systems IS, Enclosures for Industrial ontrol Systems NE The National Electrical ode provides regulations concerning the installation and use of various types of electrical equipment. opies of the NE Handbook can often be obtained from your local electrical equipment distributor or your local library. Local and State gencies many local governments and state governments have additional requirements above and beyond those described in the NE Handbook. heck with your local Electrical Inspector or Fire Marshall office for information. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

30 G LG 0V Y0 Y Y Y Y0 Y Y Y (L) (N) V 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N.. PUT: -0V 0-0Hz.0, - V.0 PWR: 00-0V 0-0Hz 0V INPUT: - V - m 0 X X X X X X X X X X N.. X0 X X X X0 X X X X0 X N.. PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines Three Levels of Protection The publications mentioned provide many ideas and requirements for system safety. t a minimum, you should follow these regulations. lso, you should use the following techniques, which provide three levels of system control. Emergency stop switch for disconnecting system power Mechanical disconnect for output module power Orderly system shutdown sequence in the PL control program Emergency Stops It is recommended that emergency stop circuits be incorporated into the system for every machine controlled by a PL. For maximum safety in a PL system, these circuits must not be wired into the controller, but should be hardwired external to the PL. The emergency stop switches should be easily accessed by the operator and are generally wired into a master control relay (MR) or a safety control relay (SR) that will remove power from the PL I/O system in an emergency. MRs and SRs provide a convenient means for removing power from the I/O system during an emergency situation. y de-energizing an MR (or SR) coil, power to the input (optional) and output devices is removed. This event occurs when any emergency stop switch opens. However, the PL continues to receive power and operate even though all its inputs and outputs are disabled. The MR circuit could be extended by placing a PL fault relay (closed during normal PL operation) in series with any other emergency stop conditions. This would cause the MR circuit to drop the PL I/O power in case of a PL failure (memory error, I/O communications error, etc.). Guard Line Switch Emergency Stop MR MR E STOP Y X LOGI Use E-Stop and Master Relay Koyo Power On L to Output ommons 0 L to Input ommons (optional) Guard Link 0-0R PORT PORT Master ontrol Relay Saw rbor TERM RUN STOP 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

31 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 Emergency Power isconnect properly rated emergency power disconnect should be used to power the PL controlled system as a means of removing the power from the entire control system. It may be necessary to install a capacitor across the disconnect to protect against a condition known as outrush. This condition occurs when the output Triacs are turned off by powering off the disconnect, thus causing the energy stored in the inductive loads to seek the shortest distance to ground, which is often through the Triacs. fter an emergency shutdown or any other type of power interruption, there may be requirements that must be met before the PL control program can be restarted. For example, there may be specific register values that must be established (or maintained from the state prior to the shutdown) before operations can resume. In this case, you may want to use retentive memory locations, or include constants in the control program to insure a known starting point. Orderly System Shutdown Ideally, the first level of fault detection is the PL control program, which can identify machine problems. ertain shutdown sequences should be performed. The types of problems are usually things such as jammed parts, etc. that do not pose a risk of personal injury or equipment damage. WRNING: The control program must not be the only form of protection for any problems that may result in a risk of personal injury or equipment damage. Jam etect Turn off Saw lass, ivision pproval (pplies ONLY to modules used with a L0 PL.) This equipment is suitable for use in lass, ivision, groups,, and or nonhazardous locations only. WRNING: Explosion Hazard! Substitution of components may impair suitability for lass, ivision. o not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or area is known to be nonhazardous. RST RST Retract L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

32 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines System Wiring Strategies The irectlogi Micro PLs are very flexible and will work in many different wiring configurations. y studying this section before actual installation, you can probably find the best wiring strategy for your application. This will help to lower system cost, wiring errors, and avoid safety problems. PL Isolation oundaries PL circuitry is divided into three main regions separated by isolation boundaries, shown in the drawing below. Electrical isolation provides safety, so that a fault in one area does not damage another. powerline filter will provide isolation between the power source and the power supply. transformer in the power supply provides magnetic isolation between the primary and secondary sides. Opto-couplers provide optical isolation in Input and Output circuits. This isolates logic circuitry from the field side, where factory machinery connects. Note that the discrete inputs are isolated from the discrete outputs, because each is isolated from the logic side. Isolation boundaries protect the operator interface (and the operator) from power input faults or field wiring faults. When wiring a PL, it is extremely important to avoid making external connections that connect logic side circuits to any other. Power input Primary Side Filter PL Isolation oundary Main Power Supply Secondary, or Logic side PU Programming evice or Operator Interface Input ircuit Output ircuit Field Side Isolation oundary iscrete inputs iscrete outputs 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

33 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 The following figures show the internal layout of the L0 and L0 PLs, as viewed from the front panels. Power Input L0 PL Main Power Supply Filter Power Input Filter Main Power Supply L0 PL Input ircuit iscrete Inputs ommons iscrete Outputs 0 iscrete Inputs Output ircuit PU Input ircuit PU To Programming evice or Operator Interface omm. Ports Output ircuit iscrete Outputs ommons ommons Optional I/O ircuits Optional I/O ircuits ommons omm. Ports To Programming evice, Operator Interface or networking L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

34 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines Sinking/Sourcing oncepts efore going further in our study of wiring strategies, we must have a solid understanding of sinking and sourcing concepts. Use of these terms occurs frequently in input or output circuit discussions. It is the goal of this section to make these concepts easy to understand, further ensuring your success in installation. First we give the following short definitions, followed by practical applications. Sinking = Path to supply ground ( ) Sourcing = Path to supply source (+) First you will notice that these are only associated with circuits and not, because of the reference to (+) and ( ) polarities. Therefore, sinking and sourcing terminology only applies to input and output circuits. Input and output points that are either sinking or sourcing can conduct current in only one direction. This means it is possible to connect the external supply and field device to the I/O point with current trying to flow in the wrong direction, and the circuit will not operate. However, we can successfully connect the supply and field device every time by understanding sourcing and sinking. For example, the figure to the right depicts a sinking input. To properly connect the external supply, we just have to connect it so the the input provides a path to ground ( ). So, we start at the PL input terminal, follow through the input sensing circuit, exit at the common terminal, and connect the supply ( ) to the common terminal. y adding the switch, between the supply (+) and the input, we have completed the circuit. urrent flows in the direction of the arrow when the switch is closed. y applying the circuit principle above to the four possible combinations of input/output sinking/sourcing types, we have the four circuits as shown below. irectlogi Micro PLs provide all except the sourcing output I/O circuit types. Sinking Input + Sourcing Input + Input ommon ommon Input PL Input Sensing PL Input Sensing + Sinking Output PL Output Switch Output Input (sinking) ommon ommon Sourcing Output PL ommon Output Switch Output Load Load + + PL Input Sensing 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

35 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 I/O ommon Terminal oncepts In order for a PL I/O circuit to operate, current must enter at one terminal and exit at another. This means at least two terminals are associated with every I/O point. In the figure to the right, the Input or Output terminal is the main path for the current. One additional terminal must provide the return path to the power supply. If we had unlimited space and budget for I/O terminals, then every I/O point could have two dedicated terminals just as the figure above shows. However, providing this level of flexibility is not practical or even necessary for most applications. So, most Input or Output point groups on PLs share the return path among two or more I/O points. The figure to the right shows a group (or bank) of input points which share a common return path. In this way, the four inputs require only five terminals instead of eight. NOTE: In the circuit above, the current in the common path is equal to the sum of the energized channels. This is especially important in output circuits, where larger gauge wire is sometimes needed for the common. Some of the input and output modules often share a common return path. The best indication of I/O common grouping is on the wiring label. The combination I/O module to the right is an exception. The inputs and the outputs have separate commons. + + Field evice Main Path (I/O point) Return Path Input Input Input Input ommon PL PL I/O ircuit Input Sensing L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

36 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines onnecting I/O to Solid State Field evices In the previous section on Sourcing/Sinking concepts, we explained that I/O circuits sometimes will only allow current to flow one way. This is also true for many of the field devices which have solid-state (transistor) interfaces. In other words, field devices can also be sourcing or sinking. When connecting two devices in a series circuit, one must be wired as sourcing and the other as sinking. Solid State Input Sensors The PL inputs are flexible in that they detect current flow in either direction, so they can be wired as either sourcing or sinking. In the following circuit, a field device has an opencollector NPN transistor output. It sinks current from the PL input point, which sources current. The source can be a F-PS, + V, power supply or another supply (+ V or +V) of your choice, as long as the input specifications are met. Field evice Output (sinking) Ground Supply + ommon PL Input In the next circuit, a field device has an open-emitter PNP transistor output. It sources current to the PL input point, which sinks the current back to ground. Since the field device is sourcing current, no additional power supply is required. Field evice +V Output (sourcing) Ground Input (sourcing) Input (sinking) ommon PL Input Solid State Output Loads Sometimes an application requires connecting a PL output point to a solid state input on a device. This type of connection is usually made to carry a low-level signal, not to send power to an actuator. Some of the optional output modules are sinking-only. This means that each output provides a path to ground when it is energized. The six outputs of the L0 have the same electrical common, even though there are two common terminal screws. Not so with the L0 which has four isolated commons. Finally, recall that the output circuit requires power (0 V) from an external power source. In the following circuit, the PL output point sinks current to the output common when energized. It is connected to a sourcing input of a field device input. PL Output + pwr Power Output (sinking) ommon Input + (sourcing) 0- V Ground Field evice +V 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

37 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 In the next example we connect a PL output point to the sinking input of a field device. This is a bit tricky, because both the PL output and field device input are sinking type. Since the circuit must have one sourcing and one sinking device, we add sourcing capability to the PL output by using a pull-up resistor. In the circuit below, we connect Rpull-up from the output to the output circuit power input. PL Output + pwr (sinking) NOTE: O NOT attempt to drive a heavy load (> m) with this pull-up method. NOTE : Using the pull-up resistor to implement a sourcing output has the effect of inverting the output point logic. In other words, the field device input is energized when the PL output is OFF, from a ladder logic point-of-view. Your ladder program must comprehend this and generate an inverted output. Or, you may choose to cancel the effect of the inversion elsewhere, such as in the field device. It is important to choose the correct value of Rpull-up. In order to do so, we need to know the nominal input current to the field device (I input) when the input is energized. If this value is not known, it can be calculated as shown (a typical value is m). Then use I input and the voltage of the external supply to compute Rpull-up. Then calculate the power Ppull-up (in watts), in order to size Rpull-up properly. I input = R pull-up = Of course, the easiest way to drive a sinking input field device as shown below is to use a sourcing output module. The arlington NPN stage will have about. V ON-state saturation, but this is not a problem with low-current solid-state loads. irect LOI Sourcing Output + pwr Output ommon V Power R pull-up (sourcing) V supply 0. I input (turn on) R input input ommon Output Supply (sourcing) R input + Supply + Input (sinking) Ground Input (sinking) Ground Field evice R input P pull-up = Field evice R input V supply R pullup 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

38 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines Relay Output Guidelines Relay outputs are available for the irectlogi PLs. Relays are best for the following applications: Loads that require higher currents than the solid-state outputs can deliver ost-sensitive applications Some output channels need isolation from other outputs (such as when some loads require different voltages than other loads) Some applications in which NOT to use relays: Loads that require currents under 0 m Loads which must be switched at high speed or heavy duty cycle Relay outputs in the irectlogi PLs and Relay with Form contacts modules are available in two contact arrangements, shown to the right. The Form type, or SPST (single pole, single throw) type is normally open and is the simplest to use. The Form type, or SPT (single pole, double throw) type has a center contact which moves and a stationary contact on either side. This provides a normally closed contact and a normally open contact. Relay with Form contacts Some relay output module s relays share common terminals, which connect to the wiper contact in each relay of the bank. Other relay modules have relays which are completely isolated from each other. In all cases, the module drives the relay coil when the corresponding output point is on. Prolonging Relay ontact Life Relay contacts wear according to the amount of relay switching, amount of spark created at the time of open or closure, and presence of airborne contaminants. However, there are some steps you can take to help prolong the life of relay contacts: Switch the relay on or off only when the application requires it. If you have the option, switch the load on or off at a time when it will draw the least current. Take measures to suppress inductive voltage spikes from inductive loads such as contactors and solenoids (circuit given below). PL Relay Output Output ommon R Supply + Inductive Field evice Input ommon 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

39 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 Surge Suppression For Inductive Loads Inductive load devices (devices with a coil) generate transient voltages when de-energized with a relay contact. When a relay contact is closed it bounces, which energizes and de-energizes the coil until the bouncing stops. The transient voltages generated are much larger in amplitude than the supply voltage, especially with a supply voltage. When switching a -supplied inductive load the full supply voltage is always present when the relay contact opens (or bounces ). When switching an -supplied inductive load there is one chance in 0 (0 Hz) or 0 (0 Hz) that the relay contact will open (or bounce ) when the sine wave is zero crossing. If the voltage is not zero when the relay contact opens there is energy stored in the inductor that is released when the voltage to the inductor is suddenly removed. This release of energy is the cause of the transient voltages. When inductive load devices (motors, motor starters, interposing relays, solenoids, valves, etc.) are controlled with relay contacts, it is recommended that a surge suppression device be connected directly across the coil of the field device. If the inductive device has plug-type connectors, the suppression device can be installed on the terminal block of the relay output. Transient Voltage Suppressors (TVS or transorb) provide the best surge and transient suppression of and powered coils, providing the fastest response with the smallest overshoot. Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV) provide the next best surge and transient suppression of and powered coils. For example, the waveform in the figure below shows the energy released when opening a contact switching a V solenoid. Notice the large voltage spike. + V This figure shows the same circuit with a transorb (TVS) across the coil. Notice that the voltage spike is significantly reduced. + V V V + V 0 V Module Relay ontact + V 0 V Module Relay ontact L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

40 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines Use the following table to help select a TVS or MOV suppressor for your application based on the inductive load voltage. Surge Suppressors Vendor / atalog Type Inductive Load Voltage Part Number utomationirect Transient Voltage Suppressors, LiteOn iodes; from igi-key atalog: Phone: igi-key Prolonging Relay ontact Life Relay contacts wear according to the amount of relay switching, amount of spark created at the time of open or closure, and presence of airborne contaminants. There are some steps you can take to help prolong the life of relay contacts, such as switching the relay on or off only when it is necessary, and if possible, switching the load on or off at a time when it will draw the least current. lso, take measures to suppress inductive voltage spikes from inductive loads such as contactors and solenoids. For inductive loads in circuits we recommend using a suppression diode as shown in the following diagram (O NOT use this circuit with an power supply). When the load is energized the diode is reverse-biased (high impedance). When the load is turned off, energy stored in its coil is released in the form of a negative-going voltage spike. t this moment the diode is forward-biased (low impedance) and shunts the energy to ground. This protects the relay contacts from the high voltage arc that would occur just as the contacts are opening. Place the diode as close to the inductive field device as possible. Use a diode with a peak inverse voltage rating (PIV) at least 00 PIV, forward current or larger. Use a fast-recovery type (such as Schottky type). O NOT use a small-signal diode such as N, N, etc. e sure the diode is in the circuit correctly before operation. If installed backwards, it short-circuits the supply when the relay energizes. PL Relay Output Output ommon TVS TVS TVS TVS iode MOV MOV Supply + 0/0 V V 0/0 V / V / V 0/0 V 0/0 V Inductive Field evice Input ommon ZL-T-0 ZL-T- PKE0 PK0GIT N N00T N ontact igi-key, orp. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

41 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 Input Wiring Methods irectlogi Micro PLs with inputs are particularly flexible because they can be either sinking or sourcing. The dual diodes (shown to the right) allow current to flow in either direction. The inputs accept 0.. V. The target applications are + V and + V. You can actually wire half of the inputs as sinking and the other half as sourcing. Inputs grouped by a common must be all sinking or all sourcing. Input ommon PL Input Output Wiring Methods The PL output circuits are high-performance transistor switches with low on-resistance and fast switching times. Please note the following characteristics which are unique to the output type: The L0 has only one electrical common for all six outputs. ll six outputs belong to one bank. The L0 output switches are current-sinking only. However, you can still use different voltages from one load to another. The L0 has isolated commons for each group of four outputs. There are two L0 models with output switches that are current-sinking only, and one that has sourcing output switches. The output circuit inside the PL requires external power. The supply ( ) must be connected to a common terminal, and the supply (+) connects the the right-most terminal on the upper connector. Firmware and Software The discrete option modules will only function properly in a L0 with firmware version V.0 (or later). If you have a L0 with an earlier firmware version, the latest version can be downloaded from our website, If you are unable to download the latest firmware version along with the upgrade support tool software, call our technical support group to arrange to have your PL upgraded. The L0 PLs need to have irectsoft Version.0c (or later) in order for the analog feature to perform properly. The L0 must use irectsoft Version.0 in order to use the option modules. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

42 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines I/O ddressing Module I/O Points and ddressing for the L0 and L0 Each discrete option module has a set number of I/O points. (This does not hold true for the analog modules). The following table shows the number of I/O points per module when used in the L0 PL or the first slot of a L0 PL that has a discrete module installed. iscrete I/O addressing for a L0 is automatic from slot to slot by default. Input Modules Physical I/O Total I/O Points Points onsumed Slot I/O ddress F0-0SIM Input Input X00 - X0 0-0N 0 Input Input ( unused) X00 - X0 and X0 - X 0-0NF 0 Input (fast) Input ( unused) X00 - X0 and X0 - X 0-N Input Input X00 - X0 and X0 - X Input Modules Physical I/O Total I/O Points Points onsumed Slot I/O ddress F0-0N- Input Input* X00 - X0 Output Modules Physical I/O Total I/O Points Points onsumed Slot I/O ddress 0-0T 0 Output Output ( unused) Y00 - Y0 and Y0 - Y 0-T Output Output Y00 - Y0 and Y0 - Y 0-0T 0 Output Output ( unused) Y00 - Y0 and Y0 - Y 0-T Output Output Y00 - Y0 and Y0 - Y Relay Output Modules Physical I/O Total I/O Points Points onsumed Slot I/O ddress 0-0TR Output Output* Y00 - Y0 F0-0TRS Output Output ( unused)* Y00 - Y0 ombination Modules Physical I/O Total I/O Points Points onsumed Slot I/O ddress 0-0R Input, Output Input ( unused)*, Output ( unused)* X00 - X0 and Y00 - Y0 0-0 Input, Output Input ( unused)*, Output ( unused)* X00 - X0 and Y00 - Y0 * The information shown above is for utomatic I/O onfiguration, which can assign addresses in groups as small as I/O points. If manual I/O onfiguration is used, the smallest allowable address group size is I/O points. Therefore, each manually configured I/O module will consume at least X (input) and/or Y (output) addresses. The diagrams on the next page show examples of the L0 I/O addressing with various option modules installed. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

43 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 ll iscrete Modules Installed I/O ddressing Example: G LG 0V Y0 Y Y Y Y0 Y Y Y (L) (N) V 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N.. PUT: 0V 0 0Hz.0, V.0 PWR: 00 0V 0 0Hz 0V Y X INPUT: V m 0 0 X0 X0 0 0R X X X X X X X X X X N.. X X X X0 X X X X0 X N.. G LG 0V Y0 Y Y Y Y0 Y Y Y (L) (N) V 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N.. PUT: 0V 0 0Hz.0, V.0 PWR: 00 0V 0 0Hz 0V Y X INPUT: V m 0 0R X X X X X X X X X X N.. X X X X0 X X X X0 X N.. G LG 0V Y0 Y Y Y Y0 Y Y Y (L) (N) V 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N.. PUT: 0V 0 0Hz.0, V.0 PWR: 00 0V 0 0Hz 0V Y X INPUT: V m 0 X X X X X X X X X X N.. X0 X X X X0 X X X X0 X N.. Slot pt Input (discrete) X00 X Slot pt nalog Input PORT L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 Slot pt Input pt Output (discrete) PORT PORT X0 X Y00 Y0 Slot pt Input (discrete) X00 X Slot 0pt Output (discrete) Y0 Y PORT Slot pt nalog Output PORT PORT Slot pt Output (discrete) iscrete and nalog Modules Installed I/O ddressing Example: 0 0R Slot pt nalog Input Slot pt Input pt Output (discrete) X00 Y0 Y RUN RUN TERM TERM STOP Slot pt Output (discrete) iscrete and nalog Modules Installed I/O ddressing Example: X0 Y00 Y0 Y00 Y RUN TERM STOP Slot Slot pt Input pt Input pt Output (discrete) (discrete) X0 X Y0 Y X0 X STOP PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX

44 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines iscrete I/O General Specifications The following is a list of general specifications for the discrete I/O option modules that are available for both the L0 and L0 PLs. lso shown is information on the various removable connectors that are used for field wiring on the dicrete I/O option modules along with reference to the ZIPLink connection system products that are available for the -point I/O modules. General Specifications Operating Temperature 0 to ( to F) Shock MIL ST 0. Storage Temperature -0 to 0 (- to F) Hi-pot 00 V, min. Humidity to % (non-condencing) Insulation Resistance More than 0M ohms at 00V Environmental ir No orrosive gasses permitted Noise Immunity NEM IS-0 Vibration MIL ST 0. iscrete I/O onnector Specifications I/O Module onnector Wire Size Screw Torque 0-0N 0-0NF 0-N F0-0N- 0-0T 0-T 0-0T 0-T 0-0R 0-0TR 0-0 F0-0TRS utomationirect replacement terminal kit p/n 0-- or use inkle: E0, -pin. * utomationirect replacement terminal kit p/n 0-- or use inkle: E0, -pin. * ZIPLink ZL-L0 cable & ZL-M0 conn. mod. or ZL-L0L cable & ZL-ML LE conn. mod. or build your own using a -pin Molex Micro Fit.0 receptacle, p/n 0, or compatible. utomationirect replacement terminal kit p/n 0-- or use inkle: E0, 0-pin. * utomationirect replacement terminal kit p/n 0-- or use inkle: E0, -pin. * ZIPLink ZL-L0 cable & ZL-M0 conn. mod. or ZL-L0FR cable & ZL-MRL relay mod. or ZL-MTF fuse mod.or build your own using a -pin Molex Micro Fit.0 receptacle, p/n 0, or compatible. utomationirect replacement terminal kit p/n 0-- or use inkle: E0, -pin. * ZIPLink ZL-L0 cable & ZL-M0 conn. mod. or ZL-L0FR cable & ZL-MRL relay mod. or ZL-MTF fuse mod.or build your own using a -pin Molex Micro Fit.0 receptacle, p/n 0, or compatible. utomationirect replacement terminal kit p/n 0-- or use inkle: E0, 0-pin. * utomationirect replacement terminal kit p/n 0-- or use inkle: E0, 0-pin. * utomationirect replacement terminal kit p/n 0-- or use inkle: E0, -pin. * utomationirect replacement terminal kit p/n 0-- or use inkle: E0, -pin. * Screwdriver Size - WG 0. Nm N-SS (recommended) - WG 0. Nm N-SS (recommended) (see ZIPLink specifications in utomationirect catalog under onnection tab.) - WG 0. Nm N-SS (recommended) - WG 0. Nm N-SS (recommended) (see ZIPLink specifications in utomationirect catalog under onnection tab.) - WG 0. Nm N-SS (recommended) (see ZIPLink specifications in utomationirect catalog under onnection tab.) - WG 0. Nm N-SS (recommended) - WG 0. Nm N-SS (recommended) - WG 0. Nm N-SS (recommended) - WG 0. Nm N-SS (recommended) * I/O modules are supplied with connector; replacement terminal kit includes () -position & () 0-position terminal blocks. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

45 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 Glossary of Specification Terms iscrete Input One of the input connections to the PL which converts an electrical signal from a field device to a binary status (OFF or ON), which is read by the internal PU each PL scan. iscrete Output One of the output connections from the PL which converts an internal ladder program result (0 or ) to turn ON or OFF an output switching device. This enables the program to turn ON and OFF large field loads. I/O ommon connection in the input or output terminals which is shared by multiple I/O circuits. It usually is in the return path to the power supply of the I/O circuit. Input Voltage Range The operating voltage range of the input circuit. Maximum Voltage Maximum voltage allowed for the input circuit. ON Voltage Level The minimum voltage level at which the input point will turn ON. OFF Voltage Level The maximum voltage level at which the input point will turn OFF Input Impedance Input impedance can be used to calculate input current for a particular operating voltage. Input urrent Typical operating current for an active (ON) input. Minimum ON urrent The minimum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the ON state. Maximum OFF urrent The maximum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the OFF state. OFF to ON Response The time the module requires to process an OFF to ON state transition. ON to OFF Response The time the module requires to process an ON to OFF state transition. Status Indicators The LEs that indicate the ON/OFF status of an input or output point. ll LEs on the Micro PLs are electrically located on the logic side of the input or output circuit. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

46 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines Input Specifications Number of Inputs Status Indicators Power udget Requirements Weight F0-0SIM -Point Simulator Input Module ON F0-0SIM OFF 0 None V (supplied by base). g (. oz.) Y Y Y0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N.. V.0 PWR: 00 0V 0 0Hz 0V 0 0R 0 0 X X X X X X N.. X X0 X X X X0 X N.. Slot pt Input pt Output (discrete) NOTE: The L0 PU s discrete feature for the F0-0SIM module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). See our website for more information: ON F0-0SIM addressing example X00 X0 OFF 0 F0-0SIM PORT X0 X Y00 Y0 ON X0 X PORT OFF 0 F0-0SIM Y0 Y Slot pt Output (discrete) RUN TERM STOP PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

47 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 0-0N 0-Point Input Module Number of Inputs Input Voltage Range Operating Voltage Range Peak Voltage Input urrent Maximum Input urrent Input Impedance On Voltage Level Off Voltage Level Minimum ON urrent Minimum OFF urrent Off to On Response On to Off Response Status Indicators ommons Fuse Power udget Requirements imensions (mm) Weight Sink Source - V Input Specifications INPUT OM 0 (sink/source) 0.-. V - V 0.0 V Typical:.0 V. V V. - V > 0.0 V <.0 V. m 0. m - ms, Typ. ms - ms, Typ. ms Module activity: one green LE ( pts/common) Isolated No fuse V (supplied by base), (all pts ON).(W) x.(h) x.() g (. oz.) Equivalent input circuit Internal module circuitry V+ to LE Source - V Sink Source - V Sink NOTE: The L0 PU s discrete feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.00 (or later). See our website for more information: erating chart 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

48 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0-0NF 0-Point Fast Input Module Number of Inputs Input Voltage Range Operating Voltage Range Peak Voltage Input urrent Maximum Input urrent Input Impedance On Voltage Level Off Voltage Level Minimum ON urrent Minimum OFF urrent Off to On Response On to Off Response Status Indicators ommons Fuse Power udget Requirements imensions (mm) Weight Sink Source Input Specifications - V INPUT OM 0 (sink/source) 0.-. V - V 0.0 V Typical:.0 V. V V. - V > 0.0 V <.0 V. m 0. m ms, Typ. ms ms, Typ. ms Module activity: one green LE ( pts/common) Isolated No fuse V (supplied by base), (all pts ON).(W) x.(h) x.() g (. oz.) Internal module circuitry V+ to LE Source - V Sink Source - V Sink 0-0NF NOTE: The L0 PU s discrete feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). See our website for more information: Equivalent input circuit erating chart 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

49 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 0-N -Point Input Module Input Specifications Number of Inputs (sink/source) Input Voltage Range 0- V Operating Voltage Range V Peak Voltage 0.0 V Input urrent Typical:.0 V Maximum Input urrent V Input Impedance. V On Voltage Level >.0 V Off Voltage Level <.0 V Minimum ON urrent. m Minimum OFF urrent. m Off to on Response - ms, Typ. ms On to off Response - ms, Typ. ms Status Indicators Module activity: one green LE ommons ( pts/common) Isolated Fuse No fuse V Power udget Requirements (supplied by base), (all pts ON) imensions (mm).(w) x.(h) x.() Weight 0 g (0. oz.) erating chart V Use ZipLink ZL-L0 cable and ZL-M0 connector module, or ZL-L0L cable and ZL-ML LE connector module. You can also build your own cables using -pin Molex Micro Fit.0 receptacle, part number 0, or compatible. Sink Source V V Sink Source INPUT OM V Sink Source + - Equivalent input circuit - Internal module circuitry Wiring for ZL-M0 V Sink Source V Sink Source V+ to LE NOTE: The L0 PU s discrete feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.00 (or later). See our website for more information: L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

50 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines F0-0N- -Point Input Module Input Specifications Number of Inputs Input Voltage Range 0- V (0-0 V) Frequency - Hz Input urrent.0 V Input Impedance K On Voltage Level 0 V minimum Off Voltage Level 0 V maximum Minimum On urrent. m Maximum Off urrent. m Off to On Response < 0 ms On to Off Response < 0 ms Status Indicators None ommons ( pts/common) Isolated Fuse No fuse Power udget Requirements V (supplied by base), (all pts ON) imensions (mm).(w) x.(h) x.() Weight. g (. oz.) 0-V 0-0V IN 0-V 0-0Hz 0-0V F0-0N- NOTE: The L0 PU s discrete feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). See our website for more information: Equivalent input circuit erating chart 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

51 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 0-0T 0-Point Output Module Output Specifications Number of Outputs 0 (sinking) Operating Voltage Range - V Output Voltage Range -0 V Peak Voltage 0.0 V Maximum Output urrent 0. /point. /common Minimum Output urrent 0. m ON Voltage rop 0. Maximum Leakage urrent 0.0 V Maximum Inrush urrent for 0 ms OFF to ON Response < 0 µs ON to OFF Response < 0 µs Status Indicators Module activity: one green LE ommons ( points/common) Non-isolated Fuse No fuse Max. 0 Power udget Requirements V (supplied by base), (all pts. ON) External Power Required 0- V max. 00 m (all pts. ON) imensions (mm).(w) x.(h) x.() Weight g (.0 oz.) Equivalent output circuit Internal module circuitry Load - ual Power Source Wiring Load - Single Power Source Wiring Note: negative side of power sources must be tied together to both 0 & terminals. NOTE: The L0 PU s discrete feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.00 (or later). See our website for more information: erating chart L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

52 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0-T -Point Output Module Output Specifications Number of Outputs (sinking) Operating Voltage Range - V Output Voltage Range -0 V Peak Voltage 0.0 V Maximum Output urrent 0. /point 0. /common Minimum Output urrent 0. m ON Voltage rop 0. Maximum Leakage urrent 0.0 V Maximum Inrush urrent for 0 ms OFF to ON Response < 0. ms ON to OFF Response < 0. ms Status Indicators Module activity: one green LE ommons ( points/common) Non-isolated Fuse No fuse Max. 00 Power udget Requirements V (supplied by base), (all pts. ON) External Power Required 0- V max 0 m (all pts. ON) imensions (mm).(w) x.(h) x.() Weight g (0. oz.) Load - Single Power Source Wiring Load - ual Power Source Wiring Wiring for ZL-M0 Use ZipLink ZL-L0 cable and ZL-M0 connector module, or ZL-L0FR cable and ZL-MRL relay module or ZL-MTF fuse module. You can also build your own cables using -pin Molex Micro Fit.0 receptacle, part number 0, or compatible. Equivalent input circuit Internal module circuitry erating chart NOTE: The L0 PU s discrete feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.00 (or later). See our website for more information: Note: negative side of power sources must be tied together to both 0 & commons. 0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

53 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 0-0T 0-Point Output Module Output Specifications Number of Outputs 0 (sourcing) Operating Voltage Range - V Output Voltage Range 0.-. V Peak Voltage 0.0 V Maximum Output urrent 0. /point. /common Minimum Output urrent 0. m ON Voltage Maximum Leakage urrent. 0.0 V Maximum Inrush urrent for 0 ms OFF to ON Response < 0 µs ON to OFF Response < 0 µs Status Indicators Module activity: one green LE +V Terminals & ommon ( points/+v Terminal) Isolated, ommon Fuse No fuse Max. 0 Power udget Requirements V (supplied by base), (all pts. ON) imensions (mm).(w) x.(h) x.() Weight g (. oz.) erating chart Load - ual Power Source Wiring -V Load - Single Power Source Wiring NOTE: The L0 PU s discrete feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.00 (or later). See our website for more information: Equivalent output circuit Internal module circuitry L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

54 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0-T -Point Output Module Load - Single Power Source Wiring Load - ual Power Source Wiring Output Specifications Number of Outputs (sourcing) Operating Voltage Range - V Output Voltage Range 0.-. V Peak Voltage 0.0 V Maximum Output urrent 0. /point, 0. /common Minimum Output urrent 0. m ON Voltage 0. Maximum Leakage urrent. V Maximum Inrush urrent for 0 ms OFF to ON Response < 0. ms ON to OFF Response < 0. ms Status Indicators Module activity: one green LE +V Terminals & ommon ( points/+v Terminal) Isolated, ommon Fuse No fuse Max. 00 Power udget Requirements V (supplied by base), (all pts. ON) imensions (mm).(w) x.(h) x.() Weight g (0. oz.) Wiring for ZL-M0 Use ZipLink ZL-L0 cable and ZL-M0 connector module, or ZL-L0FR cable and ZL- MRL relay module or ZL-MTF fuse module. You can also build your own cables using -pin Molex Micro Fit.0 receptacle, part number 0, or compatible. -V Equivalent output circuit Internal module circuitry erating chart NOTE: The L0 PU s discrete feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.00 (or later). See our website for more information: 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

55 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 Sink 0-0R -Point Input and -Point Relay Output Module Number of Inputs Operating Voltage Range Input Voltage Range Peak Voltage Maximum Input urrent Input urrent Input Impedance ON Voltage Level OFF Voltage Level Minimum ON urrent Maximum OFF urrent OFF to ON Response ON to OFF Response ommons Source - V Input Specifications Power udget Requirements Equivalent input circuit INPUT OM Internal module circuitry erating chart for inputs (sink/source) - V 0.-. V 0.0 V V Typical: V. V. - V > 0.0 V <.0 V. m 0. m - ms, typical ms - ms, typical ms ( points/common) Max. 00 V (supplied by base), (all pts. ON) V+ to LE Source - V Sink Output Specifications Number of Outputs Operating Voltage Range - V/-0 V Output Type Relay, form, SPST Peak Voltage 0.0 V/ V Maximum urrent (Resistive) /point, /common Minimum Load urrent V Maximum Leakage urrent 0. V ON Voltage rop N/ Maximum Inrush urrent Output: for 0 ms, omm: 0 for 0 ms OFF to ON Response < ms ON to OFF Response < 0 ms Status Indicators Module acitivity: one green LE ommons ( points/common) Fuse No fuse imensions (mm).(w) x.(h) x.() Weight g (. oz.) NOTE: The L0 PU s discrete feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.00 (or later). See our website for more information: Equivalent output circuit Internal module circuitry erating chart for relay outputs L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

56 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0-0TR -Point Relay Output Module Output Specifications Number of Outputs Operating Voltage Range - V/-0 V Output Type Relay, form, SPST Peak Voltage 0.0 V/ V Maximum urrent (Resistive) /point, /common Minimum Load urrent 0.m Maximum Leakage urrent 0. V ON Voltage rop N/ Maximum Inrush urrent Output: for 0 ms, ommon: 0 for 0 ms OFF to ON Response < ms ON to OFF Response < 0 ms Status Indicators Module acitivity: one green LE ommons Isolated. ( points/common) Fuse No fuse Power udget Requirements Max. 0 V (supplied by base), (all pts. ON) imensions (mm).(w) x.(h) x.() Weight g (. oz.) NOTE: The L0 PU s discrete feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.00 (or later). See our website for more information: Equivalent output circuit Internal module circuitry erating chart 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

57 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines 0 Sink Source 0-0 -Point Input and -Point Output Module Number of Inputs Operating Voltage Range Input Voltage Range Peak Voltage Maximum Input urrent Input urrent Input Impedance ON Voltage Level OFF Voltage Level Minimum ON urrent Maximum OFF urrent OFF to ON Response ON to OFF Response ommons - V INPUT OM Input Specifications Equivalent input circuit Internal module circuitry Input erating hart (sink/source) 0.-. V - V 0.0 V V Typical: V. V. - V > 0.0 V <.0 V. m 0. m - ms, typical ms - ms, typical ms Non-isolated 0- V, max. External Power Required 0 m (all pts. ON) Max. 00 Power udget Requiremnts V (supplied by base), (all pts. ON) V+ to LE Source - V Sink Output Specifications Number of Outputs (sinking) Operating Voltage Range - V Output Voltage Range -0 V Peak Voltage 0.0 V Maximum Output urrent 0. /point,. /common Minimum Output urrent 0. m Maximum Leakage urrent. 0.0 V ON Voltage rop Maximum Inrush urrent for 0 ms OFF to ON Response < 0 µs ON to OFF Response < 0 µs Status indicators Module acitivity: one green LE ommons Non-isolated Fuse No fuse imensions (mm).(w) x.(h) x.() Weight g (.0 oz.) NOTE: The L0 PU s discrete feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.00 (or later). See our website for more information: Equivalent output circuit Internal module circuitry Output erating chart 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

58 hapter : iscrete I/O Guidelines F0-0TRS -Point Relay Output Module Output Specifications Number of Outputs Operating Voltage Range -0 V/- V Output Type - form (SPT) - form (SPST normally open) Peak Voltage 0 V/0 V Frequency - Hz Maximum urrent (Resistive) /point with no derating Minimum Load urrent 0 V Maximum Leakage urrent N/ ON Voltage rop N/ Maximum Inrush urrent OFF to ON Response ms (typical) ON to OFF Response ms (typical) Status Indicators None ommons Isolated Fuse, IE., replaceable, -FUSE- Power udget Requirements Max. 0 V (supplied by base), (all pts. ON) imensions (mm).(w) x.(h) x.() Weight g (. oz.) erating chart F0-0TRS Typical Relay Life at 0 Operations per Minute Load Type Rated Voltage Rated urrent Number of Operations Resistive 0V 0,000 Resistive 0V 0,000 Resistive V M Inductive: S-E V Motor Starter 0. M (see Note) Inductive: S-E 0V Motor Starter 0. operating. fault M (see Note) Note: Transient suppression must be installed with inductive loads. L L L ommon NO ommon NO N L L -0V -V L -0V -V L -0V -V L L -0V -V Internal ircuitry. Equivalent output circuit Equivalent output circuit Internal ircuitry. RELY V 0-0Hz 0V F0-0TRS NO-0 N-0-0 N0- - NO- - NO- N- - NOTE: The L0 PU s discrete feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). See our website for more information: 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

59 F0-0- -H. HPTER NLOG URRENT INPUT In This hapter... Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumper onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring iagram Module Operation Special V-memory Locations Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program etecting Input Signal Loss Scale onversions Special Relays Module Resolution nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter

60 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 Module Specifications The F0-0- nalog Input module offers the following features: The L0 and L0 will read all four channels in one scan. The removable terminal block makes it possible to remove the module without disconnecting the field wiring. nalog inputs can be used as process variables for the four () PI loops in the L0 and the eight () PI loops in the L0 PUs. Field device burn out is detected on all four channels when 0m range is selected. On-board active analog filtering and RIS-like microcontroller provide digital signal processing to maintain precise analog measurements in noisy environments. NOTE: The L0 PU s analog feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.00 (or later). See our website for more information: L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

61 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input The following tables provide the specifications for the F0 0 nalog Input Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Input Specifications Number of hannels, single ended (one common) Input Range 0 to 0 m or to 0 m current (jumper selectable) Resolution bit ( in 0) for 0-0m, scaled for -0m Step Response.0 ms (typ) to % of full step change rosstalk -0 d, / count maximum * ctive Low-pass Filtering - d at 0Hz (- d per octave) Input Impedance Ohm ± 0.%, / W current input bsolute Maximum Ratings -0 m to +0 m current input onverter type Successive approximation Linearity Error (End to End) ± counts maximum * Input Stability ± count * Full Scale alibration Error (Offset error not included) ± 0 counts 0m current input* Offset alibration Error ± counts m current input * Maximum Inaccuracy ( F) ±.% 0 to 0 ( to 0 F) ccuracy vs. Temperature ±00 ppm/ maximum full scale calibration (including maximum offset change) Recommended Fuse (external) 0.0 Series fast-acting current inputs * One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value ( in 0). General Specifications PL Update Rate channels per scan -bit ata Word binary data bits channel I bits diagnostic bits Operating Temperature 0 to 0 ( to 0 F) Storage Temperature -0 to 0 (- to F) Relative Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted Vibration MIL ST 0. Shock MIL ST 0. Noise Immunity NEM IS-0 Power udget Requirement 0 V (supplied by base) onnector Phoenix Mecano, Inc. Part No. K0/-. - green onnector Wire Size - WG onnector Screw Torque 0. Nm onnector Screwdriver Size N-SS (recommended) 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

62 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 Setting the Module Jumper The position of jumper J determines the input signal level. You can choose between 0m and 0 0m. The module ships with the jumper not connecting the two pins. In this position, the expected input signal is 0m. To select 0 0m signals, use the jumper to cover both pins. The default jumper setting selects a 0m signal source. The default jumper setting does not connect the two pins. WRNING: efore removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module, disconnect power to the PL and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to the PL and/or field devices. onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. o not ground the shield at both the module and the source. o not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. heck local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The F0 0 does not supply power to field devices. You will need to power transmitters separately from the PL. To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PL and the field devices. Pull the terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module. You can remove the analog module from the PL by folding out the retaining tabs at the top and bottom of the module. s the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module s connector is lifted out of the PL socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module out of its slot. OFF = 0 J L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

63 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input Wiring iagram Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0 0 terminal block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring. + See NOTE H wire 0m Transmitter + H wire 0m Transmitter H -wire 0m Transmitter H + -wire 0m Transmitter NOTE : Shields should be grounded at the signal source. NOTE : onnect all external power supply commons. NOTE : Series, 0.0 fast acting fuse is recommended for current loops. Typical User Wiring + -0V Supply Transmitter Supply H+ H H+ H H+ H H+ H urrent Loop Transmitter Impedance Manufacturers of transmitters and transducers specify a wide variety of power sources for their products. Follow the manufacturer s recommendations. In some cases, manufacturers specify a minimum loop or load resistance that must be used with the transmitter. The F0-0- provides ohm resistance for each channel. If your transmitter requires a load resistance below ohms, you do not have to make any changes. However, if your transmitter requires a load resistance higher than ohms, you need to add a resistor in series with the module. onsider the following example for a transmitter being operated from a 0 V supply with a recommended load resistance of 0 ohms. Since the module has a ohm resistor, you need to add an additional resistor. R = Tr Mr R = resistor to add R = 0 Tr = Transmitter Requirement R Mr = Module resistance (internal ohms) Supply +0V 0V Internal Module Wiring OV ohms ohms ohms ohms nalog Switch to onverter nalog Inpu t HNNELS 0 0m 0m H H H H F0 0 PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX Two-wire Transmitter + Module hannel R H OM 0V 00 ohms 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

64 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence The L0 and L0 will read all four channels of input data during each scan. Each PU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail beginning in the section on Special V memory Locations. Scan Read Inputs Execute pplication Program Read the data Store data Write to Outputs Scan N Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ L0/L0 PL h,,, h,,, h,,, h,,, h,,, nalog Module Updates Even though the channel updates to the PUs are synchronous with the PU scan, the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signals and converts each signal into a -bit binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program. The module takes approximately milliseconds to sense % of the change in the analog signal. For the vast majority of applications, the process changes are much slower than these updates. NOTE: If you are comparing other manufacturers update times (step responses) with ours, please be aware that some manufacturers refer to the time it takes to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Our analog to digital conversion takes only a few microseconds. It is the settling time of the filter that is critical in determining the full update time. Our update time specification includes the filter settling time. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

65 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input Special V-memory Locations Formatting the Module ata The L0 and L0 PLs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option slots. These V-memory locations allow you to: specify the data format (binary or ) specify the number of channels to scan ( channels for the F0 0 ) specify the V-memory locations to store the input data L0 ata Formatting The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the L0 PL for the F0 0. nalog Input Module L0 Special V-memory Locations ata Type and Number of hannels Storage Pointer Structure of V00 Special V memory location 00 identifies that a F0 0 module is installed in the L0 option slot and the data type to be either binary or. Loading a constant of 00 into V00 identifies a channel analog input module is installed in the L0 option slot, and reads the input data values as numbers. Loading a constant of 00 into V00 identifies a channel analog input module is installed in the L0 option slot, and reads the input data values as binary numbers. V00 V0 Structure of V0 V0 is a system V memory location used as a pointer to a user V-memory location where the analog input data is stored. The V memory location loaded into V0 is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location for reading the analog input data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O000 causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000, h s data value to V00, h s data value to V00, and h s data value to V00. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 on page. MS MS LS 0 LS L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

66 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 L0 ata Formatting Special V memory locations are assigned to the four option slots of the L0 PL. The table below shows these V-memory locations which can be used to setup the F0 0. nalog Input Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. ata Type and Number of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Storage Pointer V0 V V V Setup ata Type and Number of hannels V memory locations 00, 0, 0 and 0 are used to set the data format to be read in either binary or, and to set the number of channels that will be active. For example, the F0 0 is installed in slot. Loading a constant of 00 into V00 sets channels active, and the input data value is read as a number. With the F0 in slot, loading a constant of 00 into V00 sets channels active, and the input data value is read as a binary number. Storage Pointer Setup V memory locations 0,, and are special locations used as storage pointers. V memory address is loaded into this location as an octal number identifying the first user V- memory location for the analog input data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O000 causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000, h s data value to V00, h s data value to V00, and h s data value to V00. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 beginning on page 0. MS MS LS 0 LS L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

67 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method The L0 PU examines the pointer values (the memory locations identified in V00 and V0) on the first scan only. The example program below shows how to setup these locations. This rung can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V000 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K00 - or - L K00 V00 L O000 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (set to for the F0 0 ). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here would designate the following addresses. h V000, h V00, h V00, h V00 The octal address (O000) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

68 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 L0 Pointer Method Use the special V memory table below as a guide to setup the storage pointer in the following example for the L0. Slot is the left most option slot. The PU will examine the pointer values at these locations only after a mode transition. nalog Input Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. No. of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Input Pointer V0 V V V The F0 0 can be installed in any available L0 option slot. Using the example program from the previous page, but changing the V memory addresses, the ladder diagram below shows how to setup these locations with the module installed in slot of the L0. Use the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. Like the L0 example, this logic is all that is required to read the analog input data into V- memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations with the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V000 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K00 - or - L K00 V00 L O000 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (set to for the F0 0 ). The binary format can be used for displaying data on some operator interface units and the L0 L display. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here would designate the following addresses. h V000, h V00, h V00, h V00 The octal address (O000) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the first option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

69 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input etecting Input Signal Loss nalog Signal Loss The F0 0 analog module can sense the loss of analog input signals in 0m loops. The Special Relays described on page allow you to use this feature in your ladder program. For example, in the rung below SP0 is used to pull-in coil Y, which would be used to open or close an external circuit. SP0 NOTE: The F0 0 analog module cannot sense the loss of analog input signals in 0 0m loops. See page for information about setting the jumper to select your input type. Scale onversions Scaling the Input ata Many applications call for measurements in engineering units, which can be more meaningful than raw data. onvert to engineering units using the formula shown to the right. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units. For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to. then you would have to multiply the analog value by 0 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier. nalog Value of 0, slightly less than half scale, should yield. PSI Example without multiplier Units = Units = Units = H L + L Y Example with multiplier Units = 0 H L Units = Units = The Special Relay SP0 detects a loss of input signal to channel. Use SP0 to trigger an alarm or shut down a machine. Units = H L H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range = nalog value (0 ) + L L 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

70 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 The onversion Program The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have data loaded into the appropriate V- memory locations using instructions that apply for the model of PU you are using. Note: this example uses SP, which is always on. You could also use an X,, etc. permissive contact. SP L V000 MUL K000 IV K0 V00 nalog and igital Value onversions Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. For example, if you have measured the signal as 0m, you can use the formula to determine the digital value that will be stored in the V-memory location that contains the data. When SP is on, load channel data to the accumulator. Multiply the accumulator by 000 (for a range of 0 000). ivide the accumulator by 0 (the module resolution). Store the result in V00. Range If you know the digital value If you know the analog signal level to 0m = to 0m = 0 0 = 0 = 0 = = 0 ( - ) = 0.. 0m L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

71 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input Special Relays The list of other Special Relays associated with the L0 and L0 PLs are contained in the L0 User Manual and the L0 User Manual. The following special relays are new and relate to the status of the F0 0 module or one of its input channels. L0 Special Relays L0 Special Relays SP00 han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP0 han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP0 han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP0 han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP0 han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good L0 SpecialRelays L0 Special Relays Slot SP0 han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP0 han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good Slot SP0 han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP0 han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

72 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 L0 Special Relays (cont d) Slot SP0 han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP0 han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good Slot SP0 han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP han input type 0 = 0-0m = - 0m SP0 han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good SP han input open = xmitter signal open 0 = xmitter signal good L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

73 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input Module Resolution nalog ata its The first twelve bits represent the analog data in binary format. it Value it Value Resolution etails Since the module has -bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 0 counts ranging from 0-0 ( ). For example, a m signal would be 0 and a 0m signal would be 0. This is equivalent to a binary value of to, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation: 0m m 0m 0 0 Resolution = H L 0 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LS change in the data value for each increment of the signal change. m Range Signal Span (H L) MS ivide y 0 Smallest etectable hange to 0m m 0.0µ 0 to 0m 0m 0.µ LS = data bits 0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

74 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Please refer to the PI Loop Operation chapter in the L0 or L0 User Manual for information on the built-in PV filter (L0/0) and the ladder logic filter (L0 only) shown below. filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PI loops to prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics. Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help stabilize PI loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator interface display, etc. Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters to smooth the analog input signal. Using inary ata Format SP L V000 TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V00 Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format and has been loaded from V memory location V000 00, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increase filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering.) dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Loads the binary number filtered value from the accumulator into location V00 to use in your application or PI loop. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

75 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog urrent Input NOTE: e careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method in format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (IN) as shown below. If you are using the pointer method in inary format, the conversion to binary (IN) instruction is not needed. Using ata Format SP L V000 IN TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V0 Loads the analog signal, which is in format and has been loaded from V memory location V000, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts the value in the accumulator to binary. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increase filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering.) dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a number. Note: The instruction is not needed to PI loop PV (loop PV is a binary number). Loads the number filtered value from the accumulator into location V0 to use in your application or PI loop. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

76 F0-0H- -H. HPTER NLOG URRENT INPUT In This hapter... Module Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring iagram Module Operation Special V-memory Locations Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program Scale onversions Module Resolution nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter

77 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 Module Specifications The F0-0H- nalog Input module offers the following features: The L0 and L0 will read all eight channels in one scan. The removable terminal block simplifies module replacement. nalog inputs can be used as process variables for the four () PI loops in the L0 and the eight () PI loops in the L0 PUs. On-board active analog filtering and RIS-like microcontroller provide digital signal processing to maintain precise analog measurements in noisy environments. NOTE: The L0 PU s analog feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). See our website for more information: L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

78 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input The following tables provide the specifications for the F0 0H nalog Input Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Input Specifications Inputs per module Input Range 0-0m Resolution -bit,.0µ/bit Input Type Single Ended (one common) Maximum ontinuous Overload ±m Input Impedance 00 ohms, /0W, current input Filter haracteristics Low pass, 0Hz PL ata Format -bit, Unsigned Integer, 0 FFFF (binary) or 0 () Sample uration Time 0.ms (time to % of full step change per channel) ll hannel Update Rate.ms (0.ms x ch.) Open ircuit etection Time Zero reading within s onversion Method Successive pproximation ccuracy vs. Temperature ±0PPM/ Maximum Maximum Inaccuracy 0.% of range (including temperature changes) Linearity Error (End to End) ±0 count maximum; Monotonic with no missing codes Input Stability and Repeatability ±0 count maximum Full Scale alibration Error (incl offset) ±0 count maximum Offset alibration Error ±0 count maximum Maximum rosstalk at, 0 Hz and 0 Hz ±0 count maximum Recommended Fuse (external) Littelfuse Series,.0 fuse External V Power Required m ase Power Required (.0V) m Each channel requires words of V-memory irrespective of the format used. General Specifications Operating Temperature 0 to ( to F) Storage Temperature -0 to 0 (- to F) Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted (EN- pollution degree ) Vibration MIL ST 0. Shock MIL ST 0. Field to Logic side Isolation 00V applied for second (00% tested) Insulation Resistance >0M 00V NEM IS-0; Impulse ms pulse; RFI, (MHz, Noise Immunity 0Mhz cm); Worst case error during noise disturbance is.% of full scale gency pprovals UL0; UL00- Zone Module Location ny slot in a L0 or L0 System Field Wiring Removable Terminal lock Weight g (. oz.) 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

79 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring WRNING: efore removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module, disconnect power to the PL and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to the PL and/or field devices. Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. o not ground the shield at both the module and the source. o not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. heck local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The F0 0H does not supply power to field devices. You will need to power transmitters separately from the PL. To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PL and the field devices. Pull the terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module. You can remove the analog module from the PL by folding out the retaining tabs at the top and bottom of the module. s the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module s connector is lifted out of the PL socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module out of its slot. NOTE: The F0 0H analog module cannot sense the loss of analog input signals in 0 0m loops. Terminal lock Specifications Number of Positions Re-Order Number 0-- Pitch. inch (.0 mm) Wire Range -WG Solid or Stranded onductor; Wire strip length /" (-mm) Screwdriver Size (Slotted) 0.T x.w mm (part number N-SS) Screw Size M. size Screw Torque. inch-pounds (. Nm) L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

80 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input Wiring iagram Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0 0H terminal block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring. -wire 0m Transmitter -wire 0m Transmitter -wire 0m Transmitter -wire 0m Transmitter + urrent Loop Transmitter Impedance Manufacturers of transmitters and transducers specify a wide variety of power sources for their products. Follow the manufacturer s recommendations. In some cases, manufacturers specify a minimum loop or load resistance that must be used with the transmitter. The F0-0H- provides 00 ohm resistance for each channel. If your transmitter requires a load resistance below 00 ohms, you do not have to make any changes. However, if your transmitter requires a load resistance higher than 00 ohms, you need to add a resistor in series with the module. onsider the following example for a transmitter being operated from a 0 V supply with a recommended load resistance of 0 ohms. Since the module has a 00 ohm resistor, you need to add an additional resistor. R = Tr Mr R = Resistor to add R = 0 00 Tr = Transmitter requirement R 0 Mr = Module resistance (internal 00 ohms) Supply +0V 0V -0m Transmitter Shield, h. SEE NOTE. -0m Transmitter Shield, h. -0m Transmitter Shield, h. -0m Transmitter Shield, h. SHIEL ONNETE TO SIGNL SOURE OMMON. SEE NOTE. Typical User Wiring.0 or Note : Littelfuse Series, 0.0 fast-acting fuse is recommended for all -0m current loops. Note : o not connect both ends of shield. V Power Supply H H OM H H OM OM +V 0V Two-wire Transmitter + Module hannel R Internal Module ircuitry 00 Ω 00 Ω 00 Ω 00 Ω 00 Ω 00 Ω 00 Ω 00 Ω 0V H H H H H H H H ISOLTE NLOG IRUIT POWER H OM IN 00 ohms NLOG 0 0m F0-0H- H H H H OM H H H H OM OM +V 0V 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 0V

81 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence The L0 and L0 will read all eight channels of input data during each scan. Each PU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail beginning in the section on Special V memory Locations. Scan Read Inputs Execute pplication Program Read the data Store data Write to Outputs Scan N Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ L0/L0 PL h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, nalog Module Updates Even though the channel updates to the PUs are synchronous with the PU scan, the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signals and converts each signal into a -bit binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program. The module takes approximately 0. milliseconds to sense % of the change in the analog signal per channel. It takes approximately. ms to sample all channels if channels are used (0. ms X channels =. ms). NOTE: If you are comparing other manufacturers update times (step responses) with ours, please be aware that some manufacturers refer to the time it takes to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Our analog to digital conversion takes only a few microseconds. It is the settling time of the filter that is critical in determining the full update time. Our update time specification includes the filter settling time. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

82 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input Special V-memory Locations Formatting the nalog Module ata The L0 and L0 PLs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option slots. These V-memory locations allow you to: specify the data format (binary or ) specify the number of channels to scan (up to channels for the F0 0H ) specify the V-memory locations to store the input data L0 ata Formatting The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the L0 PL for the F0 0H. nalog Input Module L0 Special V-memory Locations ata Type and Number of hannels Storage Pointer Setup ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Special V memory location 00 is used to set the data format to either or binary and to set the number of channels that will be active. V00 V0 For example, assume the F0 0H is installed in the option slot. Loading a constant of 00 into V00 sets channels active and causes the input data value to be read as a number. With the F0 0H in the option slot, loading a constant of 00 into V00 sets channels active, and the input data value is read as a binary number. Storage Pointer Setup V0 is a system V memory location used as a pointer to a user V-memory location where the analog input data is stored. The V memory location loaded into V0 is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location for reading the analog input data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O000 causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000 00, h s data value to V00 00, h s data value to V00 00, h s data value to V00 00, h s data value to V00 0, h s data value to V0 0, h s data value to V0 0, and h s data value to V0 0. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 on page. MS MS V00 setup 0 0 LS 0 V00 binary setup LS 0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

83 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 L0 ata Formatting Special V memory locations are assigned to the four option slots of the L0 PL. The table below shows these V-memory locations which can be used to setup the F0 0H. nalog Input Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. ata Type and Number of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Storage Pointer V0 V V V Setup ata Type and Number of ctive hannels V memory locations 00, 0, 0, and 0 are used to set the data format to either or binary and to set the number of channels that will be active. For example, assume the F0 0H is installed in slot. Loading a constant of 00 into V00 sets channels active and causes the input data value to be read as a number. With the F0 0H in slot, loading a constant of 00 into V00 sets channels active, and the input data value is read as a binary number. Storage Pointer Setup V memory locations 0,, and are special locations used as storage pointers. V memory address is loaded into this location as an octal number identifying the first user V memory location for the analog input data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O000 causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000 00, h s data value to V00 00, h s data value to V00 00, h s data value to V00 00, h s data value to V00 0, h s data value to V0 0, h s data value to V0 0, and h s data value to V0 0. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 beginning on page 0. MS MS V00 setup 0 0 LS 0 V00 binary setup LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

84 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic The proper use of the L0 pointer requires that the V memory address be written to the special memory location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below. The example program below shows how to setup the special V memory locations. This rung can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V000 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K00 - or - L K00 V00 L O000 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (up to for the F0-0H-). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V000-00, h V00-V00, h V00-V00, h V00-00 h V00-0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0. The octal address (O000) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exaclty where to store the incoming data. L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses the Iox instruction NLGIN. No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction. This instruction operates on the first scan only. nalog Input Module Pointer Setup NLGIN ase # (K0 - Local) Slot # Number of Input hannels Input ata Format (0 - - IN) Input ata ddress I-0 K0 K K K0 V000 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

85 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic The proper use of the L0 pointer requires that the V memory address be written to the special memory location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below. Use the special V memory table below as a guide to setup the storage pointer in the following example for the L0. Slot is the left most option slot. nalog Input Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. No. of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Input Pointer V0 V V V The F0 0H can be installed in any available L0 option slot. The ladder diagram below shows how to set up these locations with the module installed in slot of the L0. Use the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This logic is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations with the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. In the example, V000 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K00 - or - L K00 V00 L O000 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (up to for the F0-0H-). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units and the L0 display. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V000-00, h V00-V00, h V00-V00, h V00-00 h V00-0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0. The octal address (O000) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the first option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exaclty where to store the incoming data. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

86 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses the Iox instruction NLGIN. Scale onversions No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction. This instruction operates on the first scan only. Scaling the Input ata Many applications call for measurements in engineering units, which can be more meaningful than raw data. onvert to engineering units using the formula shown to the right. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units. For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to. then you would have to multiply the analog value by 0 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier. nalog Value of, slightly less than half scale, should yield. PSI. Example without multiplier Units = Units = Units = H L + L nalog Input Module Pointer Setup NLGIN ase # (K0 - Local) Slot # Number of Input hannels Input ata Format (0 - - IN) Input ata ddress Example with multiplier Units = 0 H L Units = Units = Units = + L H L H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range = nalog value (0 ) L I-0 K0 K K K0 V000 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

87 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 The onversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have data loaded into the appropriate V- memory locations using instructions that apply for the model of PU you are using. _First Scan SP0 _On SP L K00 V000 L K V00 L V000 MUL V000 IV V00 V00 V000/00 Loads the constant 00 to the accumulator. opies the constant 00 from the accumulator to the memory location V000 and V00. Loads the constant to the accumulator. opies the content of V000 from the accumulator to the memory location V00 and V00. Loads data from V000 and V00. Multiplies the accumulator value by 00 (previously loaded into V000 and V00). ivides the accumulator value by (previously loaded into V00 and V00). opies the content of the accumulator to the memory location V00 and V0. V00/0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

88 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input nalog and igital Value onversions Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine start-up or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. Range If you know the digital value If you know the analog signal level 0 to 0m 0 =. For example, if you have measured the signal as 0m, you can use the formula to determine the digital value that should be stored in the V memory location that contains the data. = = 0 = 0 = m 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

89 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 Module Resolution nalog ata its Two -bit words are reserved for the analog data whether you are using or binary data formatting. The bits in the low word represent the analog data in binary format. MS MS Resolution etails Since the module has -bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into, counts ranging from 0 -, ( ). 0m signal would be 0 and a 0m signal would be. This is equivalent to a binary value of to, or 000 to FFFF hexadecimal. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation: The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LS change in the data value for each increment of the signal change. m Range 0m 0m V00 V00 0 0m 0 Signal Span (H L) Example LS 0 LS 0 0 Resolution = ivide y H L H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range Smallest etectable hange 0 to 0m 0m.0µ MS inary Example V000 LS MS = data bits 0 V000 LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

90 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Please refer to the PI Loop Operation chapter in the L0 or L0 User Manual for information on the built-in PV filter (L0/0) and the ladder logic filter (L0 only) shown below. filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PI loops to prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics. Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help stabilize PI loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator interface display, etc. Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters to smooth the analog input signal. inary ata Format Filter Using Ladder Logic SP L V000 TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V00 Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format and has been loaded from V memory location V000 00, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increase filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering.) dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Loads the binary number filtered value from the accumulator into location V00 to use in your application or PI loop. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

91 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 NOTE: e careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method in format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (IN) as shown below. If you are using the pointer method in inary format, the conversion to binary (IN) instruction is not needed. ata Format Filter Using Ladder Logic SP L V000 IN TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V00 Loads the analog signal, which is in format and has been loaded from V memory location V000 00, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts the value in the accumulator to binary. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increase filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering.) dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a number. Note: The instruction is not needed to PI loop PV (loop PV is a binary number). Loads the number filtered value from the accumulator into location V00 to use in your application or PI loop. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

92 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input Example ode to Scale a 0m Signal to (For applications where the field transmitter sends a 0m signal to the analog input card.) This example will scale the first input, a double word value located at V000 and V00, as a 0m input signal from ecause the input card ranges from 0 0m instead of 0m, an offset value must be used to deal with the 0 m values. ny value below a m (0) value is forced to a m (0) value. Load V00 with the maximum engineering value (000 in this example). Load V0 with the maximum -bit value after the m value (0) is subtracted. SP etermine if the incoming value is below m, or 0 counts. V00 K V000 K0 V00 = K If the incoming value is below m (0 count) then load the minumum count value of 0 into the accumulator. 0 If the incoming value is between m and 0m then load the incoming count value into the accumulator. 0 Scale the incoming raw count of 0 to to a value between 0 and 000. Output the value in V000. SP L K000 V00 L K V0 0 L K0 L V000 SU K0 MUL V00 IV V0 V000 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

93 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Input 0 Example ode to Scale a 0m Signal to inary (For applications where the field transmitter sends a 0m signal to the analog input card.) This example will scale the first input, a binary/decimal value located at V000 (the PU reserves two words for each channel so V000 and V00 are reserved), as a 0m input signal from ecause the input card ranges from 0 0m instead of 0m, an offset value must be used to deal with the 0 m values. ny value below a m (0 or h) value is forced to a m (0 or h) value. Load V00 with the maximum engineering value (000 or Eh in this example). Load V0 with the maximum -bit value after the m value (0 or h) is subtracted. SP If the incoming value is between m and 0m then load the incoming count value into the accumulator. V000 K L K000 IN V00 L K IN V0 If the incoming value is below m (0 or h) then load the minumum count value of 0 (h) into the accumulator. V000 K L < K L V000 Scale the incoming raw count of 0 (h) to (FFFFh) to a value between 0 and 000 (Eh). Output the value in V000 as a binary/decimal number. SP SU K MUL V00 IV V0 V000 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

94 F0-0- -H. NLOG VOLTGE INPUT HPTER In This hapter... Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumpers onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring iagram Module Operation Special V-memory Locations Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program Scale onversions Module Resolution nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter

95 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 Module Specifications The F0-0- nalog input module offers the following features: The L0 and L0 will read all four channels in one scan. The removable terminal block makes it possible to remove the module without disconnecting the field wiring. nalog inputs can be used as process variables for the four () PI loops in the L0 PU and the eight () PI loops in the L0 PUs. On-board active analog filtering and RIS-like microcontroller provide digital signal processing to maintain precise analog measurements in noisy environments. NOTE: The L0 PU s analog feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.00 (or later). See our website for more information: L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

96 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input The following tables provide the specifications for the F0 0 nalog Input Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Input Specifications Number of hannels, single ended (one common) Input Range 0 to V or 0 to 0 V (jumper selectable) Resolution bit ( in 0) Step Response 0.0 ms to % of full step change rosstalk -0 d, / count maximum* ctive Low-pass Filtering - d at 00Hz (- d per octave) Input Impedance Greater than 0K bsolute Maximum Ratings ± V Linearity Error (End to End) ± counts maximum* Input Stability ± count * Gain Error ± counts maximum * Offset Error ± counts maximum* Maximum Inaccuracy ( F) ±0.% 0 to 0 ( to 0 F) ccuracy vs. Temperature ±00 ppm/ typical * One count in the specification tables is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value ( in 0). General Specifications PL Update Rate input channels per scan -bit ata Word binary data bits Operating Temperature 0 to 0 ( to 0 F) Storage Temperature -0 to 0 (- to F) Relative Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental ir No corrosive gases permitted Vibration MIL ST 0. Shock MIL ST 0. Noise Immunity NEM IS-0 Power udget Requirement V (supplied by base) onnector Phoenix Mecano, Inc. Part No. K0/-. - green onnector Wire Size - WG onnector Screw Torque 0. Nm onnector Screwdriver Size N-SS (recommended) 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

97 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 Setting the Module Jumpers The position of the J jumpers determines the input signal levels. You can choose between 0 V or 0 0V. The module ships with the jumpers installed connecting the pins. In this position, the input signal level is 0 V. To select 0 0V signals, use the jumper selection chart located on the module. One or more channels can be selected for 0 0 V input signal level by removing the jumper from the connecting pin of the appropriate channel. This allows you to have some channels selected for 0 V signals and other channels selected for 0 0 V signals. J jumpers shown below are configured as H and H set for 0 0V, and H and H set for 0 V. Refer to jumper selection chart. H H H INPUTS H WRNING: efore removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module, disconnect power to the PL and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to the PL and/or field devices. J ON=0 V RNGE L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

98 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. o not ground the shield at both the module and the source. o not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. heck local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. separate transmitter power supply may be required, depending on the type of transmitter being used. This module has a removable connector to make wiring and module removal easier. To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PL and the field devices. Pull the terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module. The analog module can be removed from the PL by folding out the retaining tabs at the top and bottom of the module. s the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module s connector is lifted out of the PL socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module out of its slot. Wiring iagram Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the terminal block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring. nalog Input -HNNELS 0 V 0 0V F0 0 H+ H+ H+ H+ 0V 0V 0V 0V 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

99 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 Module Operation Input hannel Update Sequence The L0 and L0 read four channels of input data data during each scan. The PU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail on the next page, Special V memory Locations. Scan Read Inputs Execute pplication Program Read the data Store data Write to Outputs Scan N Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ L0/L0 PL h,,, h,,, h,,, h,,, h,,, nalog Module Updates Even though the channel updates to the PU are synchronous with the PU scan, the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signals and converts each signal into a -bit binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program. The module takes approximately 0 milliseconds to sense % of the change in the analog signal. For the vast majority of applications, the process changes are much slower than these updates. NOTE: If you are comparing other manufacturers update times (step responses) with ours, please be aware that some manufacturers refer to the time it takes to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Our analog to digital conversion takes only a few microseconds. It is the settling time of the filter that is critical in determining the full update time. Our update time specification includes the filter settling time. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

100 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input Special V-memory Locations Formatting the Module ata The L0 and L0 PLs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option slots. These V-memory locations allow you to: specify the data format (binary or ) specify the number of channels to scan ( channels for the F0-0-) specify the V-memory locations to store the input data L0 ata Formatting The table below shows the special V-memory locations which are used by the L0 PL for the F0 0. nalog Input Module L0 Special V-memory Locations ata Type and Number of I/O hannels Input Storage Pointer Structure of V00 Special V memory location 00 identifies that a F0-0- module is installed in the L0 option slot and the data type to be either binary or. Loading a constant of 00 into V00 identifies a channel analog input module is installed in the L0 option slot, and reads the input data values as numbers. Loading a constant of 00 into V00 identifies a channel analog input module is installed in the L0 option slot, and reads the input data values as binary numbers. V00 V0 Structure of V0 V0 is a system V memory location used as a pointer to a user V-memory location where the analog input data is stored. The V memory location loaded into V0 is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location for reading the analog input data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O000 causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000, h s data value to V00, h s data value to V00, and h s data value to V00. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 on page. MS MS LS 0 LS L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

101 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 L0 ata Formatting Special V memory locations are assigned to the four option module slots of the L0 PL. The table below shows these V memory locations which can be used for the F0 0. nalog Input Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. Number of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Input Pointer V0 V V V Setup ata Type and Number of hannels V memory locations 00, 0, 0 and 0 are used to set the data format to be read in either binary or, and to set the number of channels that will be active. For example, the F0 0 is installed in slot. Loading a constant of 00 into V00 sets channels active, and the input data value is read as a number. With the F0 in slot, loading a constant of 00 into V00 sets channels active, and the input data value is read as a binary number. Storage Pointer Setup V-memory locations 0,, and are special locations used as storage pointers for the analog input data. With the analog module installed in slot, the V memory location loaded in V, for instance, is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location to read the analog input data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O000 using the L instruction causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000, h s data value to V00, H s data value to V00 and h s data value to V00. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 on page 0. MS MS LS 0 LS L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

102 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method The L0 PU examines the pointer values (the memory locations identified in V00 and V0) on the first scan only. The example program below shows how to setup these locations. This rung can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V000 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K00 - or - L K00 V00 L O000 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (set to for the F0 0 ). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here would designate the following addresses. h V000, h V00, h V00, h V00 The octal address (O000) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

103 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 L0 Pointer Method Use the special V memory table below as a guide to setup the pointer values in the following example for the L0. Slot is the left most option slot. The PU will examine the pointer values at these locations only after a mode transition, first scan only. The F0 0 can be installed in any available L0 option slot. Using the example program from the previous page, but changing the V memory addresses, the ladder diagram below shows how to setup these locations with the module installed in slot of the L0. Use the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. Like the L0 example, this logic is all that is required to read the analog input data into V- memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations with the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V000 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 nalog Input Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. Number of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Input Pointer V0 V V V L K00 - or - L K00 V00 L O000 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (set to for the F0 0 ). The binary format can be used for displaying data on some operator interface units and the L0 L display. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here would designate the following addresses. h V000, h V00, h V00, h V00 The octal address (O000) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the first option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

104 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input Scale onversions Scaling the Input ata Many applications call for measurements in engineering units, which can be more meaningful than raw data. onvert to engineering units using the formula shown to the right. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units. Units = H L H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range = nalog value (0 ) For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 00.0 then you would have to multiply the analog value by 0 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier. nalog Value of 0, slightly less than half scale, should yield. PSI Example without multiplier Units = Units = Units = H L + L Example with multiplier Units = 0 H L + L Units = Units = + L L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

105 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 The onversion Program The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion from input data formats 0 0. This example assumes the raw input data read at V000 is in format. Note: this example uses SP, which is always on. You could also use an X,, etc. permissive contact. SP L V000 MUL K000 IV K0 V00 When SP is on, load channel data to the accumulator (for a range of 0 000). Multiply the accumulator by 000. ivide the accumulator by 0 (the module resolution). Store the result in V00. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

106 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input nalog and igital Value onversions Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. Range If you know the digital value If you know the analog signal level 0 to V = 0 0 to 0V = 0 0 For example, if you are using the 0 0V range and you need a V signal level, use this formula to determine the digital value () that will be stored in the V-memory location that contains the data. = 0 () = 0 () 0 = 0 0 () = 0 0 (V) = (0.) () = 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

107 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 Module Resolution nalog ata its The first twelve bits represent the analog data in binary format. it Value it Value Resolution etails Since the module has -bit resolution, the analog voltage signal is converted into 0 counts ranging from 0 0 ( ). For example, with a 0 to 0V range, a 0V signal would be a count value of 0, and a 0V signal would produce a count value of 0. This is equivalent to a binary value of to, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation: 0V 0 0V 0V 0 0 Resolution = H L 0 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LS change in the data value for each increment of the signal change. Voltage Range Signal Span (H L) MS ivide y 0 Smallest etectable hange 0 to V volts 0. mv 0 to 0V 0 volts 0. mv LS = data bits 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

108 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Please refer to the PI Loop Operation chapter in the L0 or L0 User Manual for information on the built-in PV filter (L0/0) and the ladder logic filter (L0 only) shown below. filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PI loops to prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics. Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help stabilize PI loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator interface display, etc. Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters to smooth the analog input signal. Using inary ata Format SP L V000 TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V00 Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format and has been loaded from V memory location V000 00, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increase filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering.) dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Loads the binary number filtered value from the accumulator into location V00 to use in your application or PI loop. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

109 hapter : F0-0- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 NOTE: e careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method in format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (IN) as shown below. If you are using the pointer method in inary format, the conversion to binary (IN) instruction is not needed. Using ata Format SP L V000 IN TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V0 Loads the analog signal, which is in format and has been loaded from V memory location V000, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts the value in the accumulator to binary. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increase filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering.) dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a number. Note: The instruction is not needed to PI loop PV (loop PV is a binary number). Loads the number filtered value from the accumulator into location V0 to use in your application or PI loop. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

110 F0-0H- -H. NLOG VOLTGE INPUT HPTER In This hapter... Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumpers onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring iagram Module Operation Special V-memory Locations Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program Scale onversions Module Resolution nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter

111 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 Module Specifications The F0-0H- nalog Input module offers the following features: The L0 and L0 will read all eight channels in one scan. The removable terminal block simplifies module replacement. nalog inputs can be used as process variables for the four () PI loops in the L0 and the eight () PI loops in the L0 PUs. On-board active analog filtering and RIS-like microcontroller provide digital signal processing to maintain precise analog measurements in noisy environments. NOTE: The L0 PU s analog feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). See our website for more information: L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

112 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input The following tables provide the specifications for the F0 0H nalog Input Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Input Specifications Inputs per module Input Range 0-V or 0-0V (Jumper selectable) Resolution -bit, µv/bit or µv/bit Input Type Single Ended (one common) Maximum ontinuous Overload ±00V Input Impedance >00k ohms Filter haracteristics Low pass, 0Hz PL ata Format -bit, Unsigned Integer, 0 FFFF (binary) or 0 () Sample uration Time 0. ms ll hannel Update Rate. ms onversion Method Successive pproximation ccuracy vs. Temperature ±0PPM / Maximum Maximum Inaccuracy 0.% of range (including temperature drift) Linearity Error (End to End) ±0 count maximum Monotonic with no missing codes Input Stability and Repeatability ±0 count (after 0 min. warm up) Full Scale alibration Error (including Offset) ±0 counts maximum Offset alibration Error ±0 count maximum Maximum rosstalk at, 0 Hz and 0 Hz ±0 count maximum External V Power Required m ase Power Required (.0V) m Each channel requires words of V-memory irrespective of the format used. General Specifications Operating Temperature 0 to ( to F) Storage Temperature -0 to 0 (- to F) Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted (EN- pollution degree ) Vibration MIL ST 0. Shock MIL ST 0. Field to Logic side Isolation 00V applied for second (00% tested) Insulation Resistance >0M 00V NEM IS-0; Impulse ms pulse; RFI, (MHz, Noise Immunity 0Mhz cm); Worst case error during noise disturbance is.% of full scale gency pprovals UL0; UL00- Zone Module Location ny slot in a L0 or L0 System Field Wiring Removable Terminal lock Weight g (. oz.) 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

113 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 Setting the Module Jumpers The position of the jumper determines the input signal voltage levels. You can choose between 0 V or 0 0V. The 0 V position is the default position. With the jumper connecting the J posts, an input signal level of 0 V is selected. Select 0 0V inputs by removing the jumper from the J posts and placing it across the J posts. Locating the jumpers ON=0 V Setting the appropriate jumper FTS J F0-0H- J J J ON=0 0V 0 Volt Operation 0 0 Volt Operation default jumper position J J L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

114 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring WRNING: efore removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module, disconnect power to the PL and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to the PL and/or field devices. Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. o not ground the shield at both the module and the source. o not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. heck local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The F0 0H does not supply power to field devices. You will need to power transmitters separately from the PL. To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PL and the field devices. Pull the terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module. You can remove the analog module from the PL by folding out the retaining tabs at the top and bottom of the module. s the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module s connector is lifted out of the PL socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module out of its slot. Terminal lock Specifications Number of Positions Re-Order Number 0-- Pitch. inch (.0 mm) Wire Range -WG Solid or Stranded onductor; Wire strip length /" (-mm) Screwdriver Size (Slotted) 0.T x.w mm (part number N-SS) Screw Size M. size Screw Torque. inch-pounds (. Nm) 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

115 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 Wiring iagram Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0 0H terminal block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring. -wire Voltage Transmitter -wire Voltage Transmitter -wire Voltage Transmitter -wire Voltage Transmitter Voltage Transmitter Shield, h. Voltage Transmitter Shield, h. Voltage Transmitter Shield, h. Voltage Transmitter Shield, h. SHIEL ONNETE TO SIGNL SOURE OMMON. SEE NOTE. Note : o not connect both ends of shield. Typical User Wiring or V Power Supply H H OM H H OM OM +V 0V Internal Module ircuitry 0V H H H H H H H H ISOLTE NLOG IRUIT POWER IN NLOG 0 0V F0-0H- H H H H OM H H H H OM OM +V 0V L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

116 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence The L0 and L0 will read all eight channels of input data during each scan. Each PU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail beginning in the section on Special V memory Locations. Scan Read Inputs Execute pplication Program Read the data Store data Write to Outputs Scan N Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ L0/L0 PL h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, nalog Module Updates Even though the channel updates to the PUs are synchronous with the PU scan, the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signals and converts each signal into a -bit binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program. The module takes approximately 0. milliseconds to sense % of the change in the analog signal per channel. It takes approximately. ms to sample all channels if channels are used (0. ms X channels =. ms). NOTE: If you are comparing other manufacturers update times (step responses) with ours, please be aware that some manufacturers refer to the time it takes to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Our analog to digital conversion takes only a few microseconds. It is the settling time of the filter that is critical in determining the full update time. Our update time specification includes the filter settling time. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

117 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 Special V-memory Locations Formatting the nalog Module ata The L0 and L0 PLs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option slots. These V-memory locations allow you to: specify the data format (binary or ) specify the number of channels to scan (up to channels for the F0 0H ) specify the V-memory locations to store the input data L0 ata Formatting The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the L0 PL for the F0 0H. nalog Input Module L0 Special V-memory Locations ata Type and Number of hannels Storage Pointer V00 V0 Setup ata Type and Number of ctive hannels V memory location 00 is used to set the data format to either or binary and to set the number of channels that will be active. For example, assume the F0 0H is installed in the option slot. Loading a constant of 00 into V00 sets channels active and causes the input data value to be read as a number. With the F0 0H in the option slot, loading a constant of 00 into V00 sets channels active, and the input data value is read as a binary number. Storage Pointer Setup V0 is a system V memory location used as a pointer to a user V-memory location where the analog input data is stored. The V memory location loaded into V0 is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location for reading the analog input data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O000 causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000 00, h s data value to V00 00, h s data value to V00 00, h s data value to V00 00, h s data value to V00 0, h s data value to V0 0, h s data value to V0 0, and h s data value to V0 0. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 on page 0. MS MS V00 setup 0 0 LS 0 V00 binary setup LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

118 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input L0 ata Formatting Special V memory locations are assigned to the four option slots of the L0 PL. The table below shows these V-memory locations which can be used to setup the F0 0H. nalog Input Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. ata Type and Number of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Storage Pointer V0 V V V Setup ata Type and Number of ctive hannels V memory locations 00, 0, 0, and 0 are used to set the data format to either or binary and to set the number of channels that will be active. For example, assume the F0 0H is installed in slot. Loading a constant of 00 into V00 sets channels active and causes the input data value to be read as a number. With the F0 0H in slot, loading a constant of 00 into V00 sets channels active, and the input data value is read as a binary number. Storage Pointer Setup V memory locations 0,, and are special locations used as storage pointers. V memory address is loaded into this location as an octal number identifying the first user V memory location for the analog input data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O000 causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000 00, h s data value to V00 00, h s data value to V00 00, h s data value to V00 00, h s data value to V00 0, h s data value to V0 0, h s data value to V0 0, and h s data value to V0 0. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 beginning on page 0. MS MS V00 setup 0 0 LS 0 V00 binary setup LS 0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

119 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic The proper use of the L0 pointer requires that the V memory address be written to the special memory location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below. The example program below shows how to setup these locations. This rung can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V000 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K00 - or - L K00 V00 L O000 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (up to for the F0-0H-). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V000-00, h V00-V00, h V00-V00, h V00-00 h V00-0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0. The octal address (O000) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exaclty where to store the incoming data. L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses the Iox instruction NLGIN. No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction. This instruction operates on the first scan only. nalog Input Module Pointer Setup NLGIN ase # (K0 - Local) Slot # Number of Input hannels Input ata Format (0 - - IN) Input ata ddress I-0 K0 K K K0 V000 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

120 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic The proper use of the L0 pointer requires that the V memory address be written to the special memory location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below. Use the special V memory table below as a guide to setup the storage pointer in the following example for the L0. Slot is the left most option slot. nalog Input Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. No. of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Input Pointer V0 V V V The F0 0H can be installed in any available L0 option slot. The ladder diagram below shows how to set up these locations with the module installed in slot of the L0. Use the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This logic is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations with the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. In the example, V000 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K00 - or - L K00 V00 L O000 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (up to for the F0-0H-). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units and the L0 display. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V000-00, h V00-V00, h V00-V00, h V00-00 h V00-0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0. The octal address (O000) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the first option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exaclty where to store the incoming data. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

121 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses the Iox instruction NLGIN. Scale onversions No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction. This instruction operates on the first scan only. Scaling the Input ata Many applications call for measurements in engineering units, which can be more meaningful than raw data. onvert to engineering units using the formula shown to the right. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units. For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to. then you would have to multiply the analog value by 0 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier. nalog Value of, slightly less than half scale, should yield. PSI. Example without multiplier Units = Units = Units = H L + L nalog Input Module Pointer Setup NLGIN ase # (K0 - Local) Slot # Number of Input hannels Input ata Format (0 - - IN) Input ata ddress Example with multiplier Units = 0 H L Units = Units = Units = + L H L H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range = nalog value (0 ) L I-0 K0 K K K0 V000 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

122 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input The onversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have data loaded into the appropriate V- memory locations using instructions that apply for the model of PU you are using. _First Scan SP0 _On SP L K00 V000 L K V00 L V000 MUL V000 IV V00 V00 V000/00 Loads the constant 00 to the accumulator. opies the constant 00 from the accumulator to the memory location V000 and V00. Loads the constant to the accumulator. opies the content of V000 from the accumulator to the memory location V00 and V00. Loads data from V000 and V00. Multiplies the accumulator value by 00 (previously loaded into V000 and V00). ivides the accumulator value by (previously loaded into V00 and V00). opies the content of the accumulator to the memory location V00 and V0. V00/0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

123 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 nalog and igital Value onversions Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine start-up or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. Range If you know the digital value If you know the analog signal level 0 to V =. 0 0 to 0V =. For example, if you have measured the signal as V, you can use the formula to determine the digital value that will be stored in the V memory location that contains the data. = = 0 = 0 = 0 =.. V L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

124 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input Module Resolution nalog ata its Two -bit words are reserved for the analog data whether you are using or binary data formatting. The bits in the low word represent the analog data in binary format. MS MS Resolution etails Since the module has -bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into, counts ranging from 0 -, ( ). For example, with a 0V range, a 0V signal would be 0 and a 0V signal would be. This is equivalent to a binary value of to, or 000 to FFFF hexadecimal. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation: The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LS change in the data value for each increment of the signal change. m Range 0V 0V V00 V00 0 0V LS 0 0 Signal Span (H L) Example LS 0 0 Resolution = ivide y H L H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range Smallest etectable hange 0 to V volts.00mv 0 to 0V 0 volts.mv MS inary Example V000 LS MS = data bits 0 V000 LS 0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

125 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input 0 nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Please refer to the PI Loop Operation chapter in the L0 or L0 User Manual for information on the built-in PV filter (L0/0) and the ladder logic filter (L0 only) shown below. filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PI loops to prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics. Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help stabilize PI loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator interface display, etc. Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters to smooth the analog input signal. inary ata Format Filter Using Ladder Logic SP L V000 TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V00 Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format and has been loaded from V memory location V000 00, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increase filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering.) dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Loads the binary number filtered value from the accumulator into location V00 to use in your application or PI loop. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

126 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Input NOTE: e careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method in format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (IN) as shown below. If you are using the pointer method in inary format, the conversion to binary (IN) instruction is not needed. Using ata Format SP L V000 IN TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V00 Loads the analog signal, which is in format and has been loaded from V memory location V000 00, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts the value in the accumulator to binary. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increase filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering.) dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a number. Note: The instruction is not needed to PI loop PV (loop PV is a binary number). Loads the number filtered value from the accumulator into location V00 to use in your application or PI loop. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

127 F0-0H- -H. NLOG URRENT HPTER PUT In This hapter... Module Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring iagram Module Operation Special V-memory Locations Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program Output Scale onversion Module Resolution

128 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output 0 Module Specifications The F0-0H- analog output module offers the following features: Full -bit resolution. The L0 and L0 will update all four channels in one scan. The removable terminal block simplifies module replacement. NOTE: The L0 PU s analog feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). See our website for more information: L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

129 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output The following tables provide the specifications for the F0 0H nalog Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Output Specifications Outputs per module Output Range -0m Resolution -bit,.μ/bit Output Type urrent sourcing at 0m max. PL ata Format -bit, Unsigned Integer, 0 FFFF (binary) or 0 () Output value in program mode m (excluding PI, independent mode) Load Impedance 0-0 Ohms Maximum Inductive Load mh llowed load type Grounded Maximum Inaccuracy 0.% of range Maximum Full Scale alibration Error (not including offset error) ±.0% of range maximum Maximum Offset alibration Error ±.0% of range maximum ccuracy vs. Temperature ±0 ppm/ maximum full scale calibration change Maximum rosstalk ±0 counts Linearity Error (End to End) ± count maximum (±0.0% of full scale) Monotonic with no missing codes Output Stability and Repeatability ±0 LS after 0 min. warm-up typical Output Ripple.0% of Full Scale Output Settling Time. ms maximum, μs minimum (full scale change) ll hannel Update Rate 00μs Maximum ontinuous Overload Outputs open circuit protected Type of Output Protection Electronically current limited to 0m or less Output signal at power-up and power-down m External V Power Required 0m ase Power Required (.0V) m Each channel requires words of V-memory irrespective of the format used. General Specifications Operating Temperature 0 to ( to F) Storage Temperature -0 to 0 (- to F) Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted (EN- pollution degree ) Vibration MIL ST 0. Shock MIL ST 0. Field to Logic side Isolation 00V applied for second (00% tested) Insulation Resistance >0M 00V NEM IS-0; Impulse ms pulse; RFI, Noise Immunity (MHz, 0Mhz cm); Worst case error during noise disturbance is.% of full scale gency pprovals UL0; UL00- Zone Module Location ny slot in a L0 or L0 System Field Wiring Removable Terminal lock Weight g (. oz.) 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

130 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output 0 onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring WRNING: efore removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module, disconnect power to the PL and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to the PL and/or field devices. Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. o not ground the shield at both the module and the source. o not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. heck local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The F0 0H does not supply power to field devices. You will need to power transmitters separately from the PL. To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PL and the field devices. Pull the terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module. You can remove the analog module from the PL by folding out the retaining tabs at the top and bottom of the module. s the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module s connector is lifted out of the PL socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module out of its slot. Terminal lock Specifications Number of Positions Re-Order Number 0-- Pitch. inch (.0 mm) Wire Range -WG Solid or Stranded onductor; Wire strip length /" (-mm) Screwdriver Size (Slotted) 0.T x.w mm (part number N-SS) Screw Size M. size Screw Torque. inch-pounds (. Nm) L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

131 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output Wiring iagram Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0 0H terminal block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring. -0m Output h. -0m Output h. -0m Output h. -0m Output h. Typical User Wiring SHIEL ONNETE TO SIGNL SOURE OMMON ( OF SHOWN) V Power Supply H H H H OM +V 0V Internal Module ircuitry 0m current sourcing 0m current sourcing 0m current sourcing 0m current sourcing ISOLTE NLOG IRUIT OMMON H H H H ISOLTE NLOG IRUIT POWER NLOG 0m F0-0H- H H H H OM OM OM OM OM OM OM +V 0V 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

132 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output 0 Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence The L0 and L0 will write all four channels of output data during each scan. Each PU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail beginning in the section on Special V memory Locations. Scan Read Inputs Execute pplication Program Read the data Store data Write to Outputs Scan N Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ L0/L0 PL h,,, h,,, h,,, h,,, h,,, L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

133 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output Special V-memory Locations Formatting the nalog Module ata The L0 and L0 PLs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option slots. These V-memory locations allow you to: specify the data format (binary or ) specify the number of channels to update (up to channels for the F0 0H ) specify the V-memory locations where the user program will store the output data pending distribution to the output module L0 ata Formatting The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the L0 PL for the F0 0H. nalog Output Module L0 Special V-memory Locations ata Type and Number of hannels Storage Pointer ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup System memory location V00 is used to set the data format either to or binary and to set the number of channels that will be active. For example, loading a constant of 000 () into V00 sets four channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a number. lternatively, loading a constant of 00 () into V00 sets four channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a binary number. V00 V0 Storage Pointer Setup System memory location V0 is used as a pointer. It points to a user memory location where the analog output data is stored by the user program, pending distribution to the output module. n octal number is loaded to the pointer memory to identify the beginning of a block of user memory where output values are stored. For example, loading O00 into V0 causes the PU to look for h s output data value in V00 0, h s data value in V0 0, h s data value in V0 0, and h s data value in V0 0. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 on page. MS MS V00 setup 0 0 LS 0 V00 binary setup LS 0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

134 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output 0 L0 ata Formatting Special V memory locations are assigned to the four option slots of the L0 PL. The table below shows these V-memory locations which can be used to setup the F0 0H. nalog Output Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. ata Type and Number of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Output Pointer V0 V V V ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup System memory locations V00, 0, 0, and 0 are used to set the data format either to or binary and to set the number of channels that will be active. For example, loading a constant of 000 () into V00 sets four channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a number. lternatively, loading a constant of 00 () into V00 sets four channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a binary number. Storage Pointer Setup System memory locations V0,,, and are used as pointers. They point to user memory locations where the analog output data is stored by the user program, pending distribution to the output module. n octal number is loaded to the pointer memory to identify the beginning of a block of user memory where output values are stored. For example, loading O00 into V0 causes the PU to look for h s output data value in V00 0, h s data value in V0 0, h s data value in V0 0, and h s data value in V0 0. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 on page 0. MS MS V00 setup 0 0 LS 0 V00 binary setup LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

135 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic The proper use of the L0 pointer requires that the V memory address be written to the special memory location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below. The example program below shows how to setup the special V memory locations. This rung can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the analog output data from V-memory locations. In the example, V00 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K - or - L K V00 L O00 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (up to for the F0-0H-). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data to send to the output module. For example, the O00 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V00-0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0, h V0-0 The octal address (O00) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module. L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses the Iox instruction NLG. No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction. nalog Output Module Pointer Setup NLG ase # (K0 - Local) Slot # Number of Output hannels Output ata Format (0 - - IN) Output ata ddress I- K0 K K K0 V00 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

136 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output 0 L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic The proper use of the L0 pointer requires that the V memory address be written to the special memory location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below. Use the special V memory table below as a guide to setup the storage pointer in the following example for the L0. Slot is the left most option slot. nalog Output Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. No. of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Output Pointer V0 V V V The F0 0H can be installed in any available L0 option slot. The ladder diagram below shows how to setup these locations with the module installed in slot of the L0. Use the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This logic is all that is required to write the analog output data from V-memory locations. In the example, V00 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K - or - L K V00 L O00 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (up to for the F0-0H-). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units and the L0 display. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data to send to the output module. For example, the O00 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V00-0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0, h V0-0. The octal address (O00) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the first option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

137 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses the Iox instruction NLG. No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction. Output Scale onversion alculating the igital Output Value Your program has to calculate the digital value to send to the analog output module. Most applications use measurements in engineering units, so it is usually necessary to convert from engineering units to a suitable output value. The conversion to an output value can be accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You will need to substitute the engineering units for your scale into the formula to the right. For example, if you want to output pressure (PSI) between 0.0 and 00.0, you may multiply the pressure value by 0 to store in a V-memory location and eliminate the decimal point. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier. The following example demonstrates how to output. PSI. Example without multiplier U L = H L = = nalog Output Module Pointer Setup NLG ase # (K0 - Local) Slot # Number of Output hannels Output ata Format (0 - - IN) Output ata ddress Example with multiplier = = H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range = nalog value (0 ) U L H L = U L H L = U = Engineering units to output I- K0 K K K0 V00 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

138 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output 0 The onversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have data loaded into the appropriate V-memory locations using instructions that apply for the model of PU you are using. _First Scan SP0 _On SP L K00 V000 L K V00 L V00 MUL V00 IV V000 V00 V00/0 Loads the constant 00 to the accumulator. opies the constant 00 from the accumulator to the memory location V000 and V00. Loads the constant to the accumulator. opies the content of V000 from the accumulator to the memory location V00 and V00. Loads data from V00 and V0. Multiplies the accumulator value by (previously loaded into V00 and V00). ivides the accumulator value by 00 (previously loaded into V000 and V00). opies the content of the accumulator to the memory location V00 and V0. V00/0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

139 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output nalog and igital Value onversions Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. The formulas in the table show the relationship between, the analog value, and, the digital value. Range If you know the digital value If you know the analog signal level to 0m =. For example, if you need a 0m signal to achieve the desired result, you can use the formula to determine the digital value that should be used. ( ) + m =. ( m) =. =. = ( m) (0m m) 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

140 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output 0 Module Resolution nalog ata its Two -bit words are reserved for the analog data whether you are using or binary data formatting. The bits in the low word represent the analog data in binary format. Resolution etails Since the module has -bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into, counts ranging from 0 -, ( ). m signal would be 0 and a 0m signal would be. This is equivalent to a binary value of to, or 000 to FFFF hexadecimal. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation: The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LS change in the data value for each increment of the signal change. m Range MS MS 0m m V00 V00 0m 0 Signal Span (H L) Example LS 0 LS 0 0 Resolution = ivide y H L H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range Smallest etectable hange to 0m m.m MS inary Example V000 LS MS = data bits 0 V000 LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

141 F0-0H- -H. NLOG URRENT HPTER PUT In This hapter... Module Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring iagram Module Operation Special V-memory Locations Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program Output Scale onversion Module Resolution

142 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output 0 Module Specifications The F0-0H- analog output module offers the following features: The L0 and L0 will update all eight channels in one scan. The removable terminal block simplifies module replacement. Full -bit resolution. NOTE: The L0 PU s analog feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). See our website for more information: L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

143 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output The following tables provide the specifications for the F0 0H nalog Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Output Specifications Outputs per module Output Range -0m Resolution -bit,.µ/bit Output Type urrent sourcing at 0m max. PL ata Format -bit, Unsigned Integer, 0 FFFF (binary) or 0 () Output value in program mode m (excluding PI, independent mode) Load Impedance 0-0 Ohms Maximum Inductive Load mh llowed load type Grounded Maximum Inaccuracy 0.% of range Maximum Full Scale alibration Error (not including offset error) ±.0% of range maximum Maximum Offset alibration Error ±.0% of range maximum ccuracy vs. Temperature ±0 ppm/ maximum full scale calibration change Maximum rosstalk ±0 counts Linearity Error (End to End) ± count maximum (±0.0% of full scale) Monotonic with no missing codes Output Stability and Repeatability ±0 counts after 0 min. warm-up typical Output Ripple.0% of Full Scale Output Settling Time. ms maximum, µs minimum (full scale change) ll hannel Update Rate 00us Maximum ontinuous Overload Outputs open circuit protected Type of Output Protection Electronically current limited to 0m or less Output signal at power-up and power-down m External V Power Required 0m ase Power Required (.0V) m Each channel requires words of V-memory irrespective of the format used. General Specifications Operating Temperature 0 to ( to F) Storage Temperature -0 to 0 (- to F) Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted (EN- pollution degree ) Vibration MIL ST 0. Shock MIL ST 0. Field to Logic side Isolation 00V applied for second (00% tested) Insulation Resistance >0M 00V NEM IS-0; Impulse ms pulse; RFI, (MHz, Noise Immunity 0Mhz cm); Worst case error during noise disturbance is.% of full scale gency pprovals UL0; UL00- Zone Module Location ny slot in a L0 or L0 System Field Wiring Removable Terminal lock Weight g (. oz.) 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

144 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output 0 onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring WRNING: efore removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module, disconnect power to the PL and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to the PL and/or field devices. Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. o not ground the shield at both the module and the source. o not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. heck local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The F0 0H does not supply power to field devices. You will need to power transmitters separately from the PL. To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PL and the field devices. Pull the terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module. You can remove the analog module from the PL by folding out the retaining tabs at the top and bottom of the module. s the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module s connector is lifted out of the PL socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module out of its slot. Terminal lock Specifications Number of Positions Re-Order Number 0-- Pitch. inch (.0 mm) Wire Range -WG Solid or Stranded onductor; Wire strip length /" (-mm) Screwdriver Size (Slotted) 0.T x.w mm (part number N-SS) Screw Size M. size Screw Torque. inch-pounds (. Nm) L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

145 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output Wiring iagram Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0 0H terminal block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring. -0m Output h. -0m Output h. -0m Output h. -0m Output h. -0m Output h. -0m Output h. -0m Output h. -0m Output h. SHIEL ONNETE TO SIGNL SOURE OMMON ( OF SHOWN) Typical User Wiring V Power Supply H H H H OM H H H H OM OM +V 0V Internal Module ircuitry 0V 0m current sourcing 0m current sourcing 0m current sourcing 0m current sourcing 0m current sourcing 0m current sourcing 0m current sourcing 0m current sourcing H H H H H H H H ISOLTE NLOG IRUIT POWER NLOG 0m F0-0H- H H H H OM H H H H OM OM +V 0V 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

146 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output 0 Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence The L0 and L0 will read all eight channels of output data during each scan. Each PU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail beginning in the section on Special V memory Locations. Scan Read Inputs Execute pplication Program Read the data Store data Write to Outputs Scan N Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ L0/L0 PL h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

147 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output Special System V-memory Locations Formatting the nalog Module ata The L0 and L0 PLs have system V-memory locations assigned to their respective option slots. These V-memory locations allow you to: specify the data format (binary or ) specify the number of channels to scan (up to channels for the F0 0H ) specify the V-memory locations where the user program will store the output data pending distribution to the output module L0 ata Formatting The table below shows the system V-memory locations used by the L0 PL for the F0 0H. nalog Output Module L0 Special V-memory Locations ata Type and Number of hannels Storage Pointer ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup System memory location V00 is used to set the data format either to or binary and to set the number of channels that will be active. For example, loading a constant of 000 () into V00 sets eight channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a number. lternatively, loading a constant of 00 () into V00 sets eight channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a binary number. V00 V0 Storage Pointer Setup System memory location V0 is used as a pointer. It points to a user memory location where the analog output data is stored by the user program, pending distribution to the output module. n octal number is loaded to the pointer memory to identify the beginning of a block of user memory where output values are stored. For example, loading O00 into V0 causes the PU to look for h s output data value in V00 0, h s data value in V0 0, h s data value in V0 0, h s data value in V0 0, h s data value in V0, h s data value in V, h s data value in V, and h s data value in V. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 on page. MS MS V00 setup 0 0 LS 0 V00 binary setup LS 0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

148 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output 0 L0 ata Formatting Special V memory locations are assigned to the four option slots of the L0 PL. The table below shows these V-memory locations which can be used to setup the F0 0H. nalog Output Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. ata Type and Number of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Output Pointer V0 V V V ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup System memory locations V00, 0, 0, and 0 are used to set the data format either to or binary and to set the number of channels that will be active. For example, loading a constant of 000 () into V00 sets eight channels active and causes the output data values to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a number. lternatively, loading a constant of 00 () into V00 sets eight channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a binary number. Storage Pointer Setup System memory locations V0,,, and are used as pointers. They point to user memory locations where the analog output data is stored by the user program, pending distribution to the output module. n octal number is loaded to the pointer memory to identify the beginning of a block of user memory where output values are stored. For example, loading O00 into V0 causes the PU to look for h s output data value in V00 0, h s data value in V0 0, h s data value in V0 0, h s data value in V0 0, h s data value in V0, h s data value in V, h s data value in V, and h s data value in V. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 on page 0. MS MS V00 setup 0 0 LS 0 V00 binary setup LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

149 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic The proper use of the L0 pointer requires that the V memory address be written to the special memory location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below. The example program below shows how to setup the special V memory locations. This rung can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the analog output data from V-memory locations. In the example, V00 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K - or - L K V00 L O00 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (set to for the F0-0H-). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data to send to the output module. For example, the O00 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V00-0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0, h V0-0 h V0-, h V-V, h V-V, h V-V. The octal address (O00) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module. L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses the Iox instruction NLG. No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction. nalog Output Module Pointer Setup NLG ase # (K0 - Local) Slot # Number of Output hannels Output ata Format (0 - - IN) Output ata ddress I- K0 K K K0 V00 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

150 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output 0 L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic The proper use of the L0 pointer requires that the V memory address be written to the special memory location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below. Use the special V memory table below as a guide to setup the storage pointer in the following example for the L0. Slot is the left most option slot. nalog Output Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. No. of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Output Pointer V0 V V V The F0 0H can be installed in any available L0 option slot. Using the example program from the previous page, but changing the V memory addresses, the ladder diagram below shows how to setup these locations with the module installed in slot of the L0. Use the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This logic is all that is required to write the analog output data from V-memory locations. In the example, V00 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K - or - L K V00 L O00 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (up to for the F0-0H-). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units and the L0 display. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data to send to the output module. For example, the O00 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V00-0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0, h V0-0 h V0-, h V-V, h V-V, h V-V. The octal address (O00) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the first option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

151 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses the Iox instruction NLG. No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction. Output Scale onversion alculating the igital Output Value Your program has to calculate the digital value to send to the analog output module. Most applications use measurements in engineering units, so it is usually necessary to convert from engineering units to a suitable output value. The conversion to an output value can be accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You will need to substitute the engineering units for your scale into the formula to the right. nalog Output Module Pointer Setup NLG ase # (K0 - Local) Slot # Number of Output hannels Output ata Format (0 - - IN) Output ata ddress H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range = nalog value (0 ) For example, if you want to output pressure (PSI) between 0.0 and 00.0, you may multiply the pressure value by 0 to store in a V-memory location and eliminate the decimal point. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier. The following example demonstrates how to output. PSI. Example without multiplier U L = H L = = Example with multiplier = U L H L = = = U L H L U = Engineering units to output I- K0 K K K0 V00 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

152 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output 0 The onversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have data loaded into the appropriate V- memory locations using instructions that apply for the model of PU you are using. _First Scan SP0 _On SP L K00 V000 L K V00 L V00 MUL V00 IV V000 V00 V00/0 Loads the constant 00 to the accumulator. opies the constant 00 from the accumulator to the memory location V000 and V00. Loads the constant to the accumulator. opies the content of V000 from the accumulator to the memory location V00 and V00. Loads data from V00 and V0. Multiplies the accumulator value by (previously loaded into V00 and V00). ivides the accumulator value by 00 (previously loaded into V000 and V00). opies the content of the accumulator to the memory location V00 and V0. V00/0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

153 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output nalog and igital Value onversions Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. The formulas in the table show the relationship between, the analog value, and, the digital value. Range If you know the digital value If you know the analog signal level to 0m =. For example, if you need a 0m signal to achieve the desired result, you can use the formula to determine the digital value that should be used. ( ) + m =. ( m) =. =. = ( m) (0m m) 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

154 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog urrent Output 0 Module Resolution nalog ata its Two -bit words are reserved for the analog data whether you are using or binary data formatting. The bits in the low word represent the analog data in binary format. MS Resolution etails Since the module has -bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into, counts ranging from 0 -, ( ). m signal would be 0 and a 0m signal would be. This is equivalent to a binary value of to, or 000 to FFFF hexadecimal. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation: 0m m The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LS change in the data value for each increment of the signal change. m Range MS V00 V00 0m 0 Signal Span (H L) Example LS 0 LS 0 0 Resolution = ivide y H L H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range Smallest etectable hange to 0m m.µ MS inary Example V000 LS MS = data bits 0 V000 LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

155 F0-0H- -H. HPTER NLOG VOLTGE PUT In This hapter... Module Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring iagram Module Operation Special V-memory Locations Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program Output Scale onversion Module Resolution

156 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output 0 Module Specifications The F0 0H analog output module offers the following features: The L0 and L0 will update all four channels in one scan. The removable terminal block simplifies module replacement. Full -bit resolution. NOTE: The L0 PU s analog feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). See our website for more information: L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

157 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output The following tables provide the specifications for the F0 0H nalog Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Output Specifications Outputs per module Output Range 0-0V Resolution -bit, μv/bit Output Type Voltage sourcing/sinking at m max. PL ata Format -bit, Unsigned Integer, 0 FFFF (binary) or 0 () Output value in program mode 0V (excluding PI, independent mode) Output Impedance 0. Ohms typical Load Impedance >000 Ohms Maximum apacitive Load 0.0 μf maximum llowed load type Grounded Maximum Inaccuracy 0.% of range (including temperature changes) Maximum Full Scale alibration Error (including offset error) ±.0% of range maximum Maximum Offset alibration Error ±.0% of range maximum ccuracy vs. Temperature ±0 ppm/ maximum full scale calibration change Maximum rosstalk ±0 counts Linearity Error (End to End) ± count maximum (±0.0% of full scale) Monotonic with no missing codes Output Stability and Repeatability ±0 counts after 0 min. warm-up typical Output Ripple.0% of Full Scale Output Settling Time. ms maximum, μs minimum (full scale change) ll hannel Update Rate 00μs Maximum ontinuous Overload Outputs current limited to 0m typical. continuous short circuit will damage the output. Type of Output Protection V Peak Output Voltage (capacitor transient voltage suppressor) Output signal at power-up and power-down 0V External V Power Required m ase Power Required (.0V) m Each channel requires words of V-memory irrespective of the format used. General Specifications Operating Temperature 0 to ( to F) Storage Temperature -0 to 0 (- to F) Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted (EN- pollution degree ) Vibration MIL ST 0. Shock MIL ST 0. Field to Logic side Isolation 00V applied for second (00% tested) Insulation Resistance >0M 00V NEM IS-0; Impulse ms pulse; RFI, Noise Immunity (MHz, 0Mhz cm); Worst case error during noise disturbance is.% of full scale gency pprovals UL0; UL00- Zone Module Location ny slot in a L0 or L0 System Field Wiring Removable Terminal lock Weight g (. oz.) 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

158 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output 0 onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring WRNING: efore removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module, disconnect power to the PL and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to the PL and/or field devices. Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. o not ground the shield at both the module and the source. o not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. heck local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The F0 0H does not supply power to field devices. You will need to power transmitters separately from the PL. To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PL and the field devices. Pull the terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module. You can remove the analog module from the PL by folding out the retaining tabs at the top and bottom of the module. s the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module s connector is lifted out of the PL socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module out of its slot. Terminal lock Specifications Number of Positions Re-Order Number 0-- Pitch. inch (.0 mm) Wire Range -WG Solid or Stranded onductor; Wire strip length /" (-mm) Screwdriver Size (Slotted) 0.T x.w mm (part number N-SS) Screw Size M. size Screw Torque. inch-pounds (. Nm) L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

159 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output Wiring iagram Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0 0H terminal block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring. Voltage Output h. Voltage Output h. Voltage Output h. Voltage Output h. SHIEL ONNETE TO SIGNL SOURE OMMON ( OF SHOWN) Typical User Wiring V Power Supply H H H H OM +V 0V Internal Module ircuitry isolated analog circuit common voltage sink / source voltage sink / source voltage sink / source voltage sink / source H H H H ISOLTE NLOG IRUIT POWER NLOG 0 0V F0-0H- H H H H OM OM OM OM OM OM OM +V 0V 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

160 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output 0 Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence The L0 and L0 will read all four channels of output data during each scan. Each PU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail beginning in the section on Special V memory Locations. Scan Read Inputs Execute pplication Program Read the data Store data Write to Outputs Scan N Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ L0/L0 PL h,,, h,,, h,,, h,,, h,,, L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

161 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output Special V-memory Locations Formatting the nalog Module ata The L0 and L0 PLs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option slots. These V-memory locations allow you to: specify the data format (binary or ) specify the number of channels to scan (up to channels for the F0 0H ) specify the V-memory locations where the user program will store the output data pending distribution to the output module L0 ata Formatting The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the L0 PL for the F0 0H. nalog Output Module L0 Special V-memory Locations ata Type and Number of hannels Storage Pointer ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup System memory location V00 is used to set the data format either to or binary and to set the number of channels that will be active. For example, loading a constant of 000 () into V00 sets four channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a number. lternatively, loading a constant of 00 () into V00 sets four channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a binary number. V00 V0 Storage Pointer Setup System memory location V0 is used as a pointer. It points to a user memory location where the analog output data is stored by the user program, pending distribution to the output module. n octal number is loaded to the pointer memory to identify the beginning of a block of user memory where output values are stored. For example, loading O00 into V0 causes the PU to look for h s output data value in V00 0, h s data value in V0 0, h s data value in V0 0, and h s data value in V0 0. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 on page. MS MS V00 setup 0 0 LS 0 V00 binary setup LS 0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

162 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output 0 L0 ata Formatting Special V memory locations are assigned to the four option slots of the L0 PL. The table below shows these V-memory locations which can be used to setup the F0 0H. nalog Output Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. ata Type and Number of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Output Pointer V0 V V V ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup System memory locations V00, 0, 0, and 0 are used to set the data format either to or binary and to set the number of channels that will be active. For example, loading a constant of 000 () into V00 sets four channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a number. lternatively, loading a constant of 00 () into V00 sets four channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a binary number. Storage Pointer Setup System memory locations V0,,, and are used as pointers. They point to user memory locations where the analog output data is stored by the user program, pending distribution to the output module. n octal number is loaded to the pointer memory to identify the beginning of a block of user memory where output values are stored. For example, loading O00 into V0 causes the PU to look for h s output data value in V00 0, h s data value in V0 0, h s data value in V0 0, and h s data value in V0 0. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 on page 0. MS MS V00 setup 0 0 LS 0 V00 binary setup LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

163 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic The proper use of the L0 pointer requires that the V memory address be written to the special memory location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below. The example program below shows how to setup the special V memory locations. This rung can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the analog output data from V-memory locations. In the example, V00 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K - or - L K V00 L O00 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (set to for the F0-0H-). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data to send to the output module. For example, the O00 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V00-0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0, h V0-0 The octal address (O00) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module. L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses the Iox instruction NLG. No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction. nalog Output Module Pointer Setup NLG ase # (K0 - Local) Slot # Number of Output hannels Output ata Format (0 - - IN) Output ata ddress I- K0 K K K0 V00 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

164 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output 0 L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic The proper use of the L0 pointer requires that the V memory address be written to the special memory location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below. Use the special V memory table below as a guide to setup the storage pointer in the following example for the L0. Slot is the left most option slot. The F0 0H can be installed in any available L0 option slot. The ladder diagram below shows how to setup these locations with the module installed in slot of the L0. Use the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This logic is all that is required to write the analog output data from V-memory locations. In the example, V00 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 nalog Output Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. No. of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Output Pointer V0 V V V L K - or - L K V00 L O00 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (set to for the F0-0H-). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units and the L0 display. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data to send to the output module. For example, the O00 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V00-0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0, h V0-0. The octal address (O00) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the first option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

165 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses the Iox instruction NLG. No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction. Output Scale onversion alculating the igital Output Value Your program has to calculate the digital value to send to the analog output module. Most applications use measurements in engineering units, so it is usually necessary to convert from engineering units to a suitable output value. The conversion to an output value can be accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You will need to substitute the engineering units for your scale into the formula to the right. For example, if you want to output pressure (PSI) between 0.0 and 00.0, you may multiply the pressure value by 0 to store in a V-memory location and eliminate the decimal point. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier. The following example demonstrates how to output. PSI. Example without multiplier U L = H L = = nalog Output Module Pointer Setup NLG ase # (K0 - Local) Slot # Number of Output hannels Output ata Format (0 - - IN) Output ata ddress Example with multiplier = = H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range = nalog value (0 ) U L H L = U L H L = U = Engineering units to output I- K0 K K K0 V00 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

166 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output 0 The onversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have data loaded into the appropriate V- memory locations using instructions that apply for the model of PU you are using. _First Scan SP0 _On SP L K00 V000 L K V00 L V00 MUL V00 IV V000 V00 V00/0 Loads the constant 00 to the accumulator. opies the constant 00 from the accumulator to the memory location V000 and V00. Loads the constant to the accumulator. opies the content of V000 from the accumulator to the memory location V00 and V00. Loads data from V00 and V0. Multiplies the accumulator value by (previously loaded into V00 and V00). ivides the accumulator value by 00 (previously loaded into V000 and V00). opies the content of the accumulator to the memory location V00 and V0. V00/0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

167 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output nalog and igital Value onversions Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. The formulas in the table show the relationship between, the analog value, and, the digital value. Range If you know the digital value If you know the analog signal level 0 to 0V 0 =. For example, if you need a V signal to achieve the desired result, you can use the formula to determine the digital value that should be used. = = 0 = 0 = 0 V. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

168 hapter : F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output 0 Module Resolution nalog ata its Two -bit words are reserved for the analog data whether you are using or binary data formatting. The bits in the low word represent the analog data in binary format. Resolution etails Since the module has -bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into, counts ranging from 0 -, ( ). 0V signal would be 0 and a 0V signal would be. This is equivalent to a binary value of to, or 000 to FFFF hexadecimal. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation: 0V 0V The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LS change in the data value for each increment of the signal change. V Range MS MS V00 V00 0 0V 0 Signal Span (H L) Example LS 0 LS 0 0 Resolution = ivide y H L H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range Smallest etectable hange 0 to 0V 0 V μv MS inary Example V000 LS MS = data bits 0 V000 LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

169 F0-0H- -H. HPTER 0 NLOG VOLTGE PUT In This hapter... Module Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring iagram Module Operation Special V-memory Locations Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program Output Scale onversion Module Resolution

170 hapter 0: F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output 0 Module Specifications The F0 0H analog output module offers the following features: The L0 and L0 will update all eight channels in one scan. The removable terminal block simplifies module replacement. Full -bit resolution. NOTE: The L0 PU s analog feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). See our website for more information: 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

171 hapter 0: F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output The following tables provide the specifications for the F0 0H nalog Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Output Specifications Outputs per module Output Range 0-0V Resolution -bit, μv/bit Output Type Voltage sourcing/sinking at m max. PL ata Format -bit, Unsigned Integer, 0 FFFF (binary) or 0 () Output value in program mode 0V (excluding PI, independent mode) Output Impedance 0. Ohms typical Load Impedance >000 Ohms Maximum apacitive Load 0.0 μf maximum llowed load type Grounded Maximum Inaccuracy 0.% of range (including temperature changes) Maximum Full Scale alibration Error (including offset error) ±.0% of range maximum Maximum Offset alibration Error ±.0% of range maximum ccuracy vs. Temperature ±0 ppm/ maximum full scale calibration change Maximum rosstalk at, 0 Hz and 0 Hz. 0 counts Linearity Error (End to End) ± count maximum (±0.0% of full scale) Monotonic with no missing codes Output Stability and Repeatability ±0 counts after 0 min. warm-up typical Output Ripple.0% of Full Scale Output Settling Time. ms maximum, μs minimum (full scale change) ll hannel Update Rate 00μs Maximum ontinuous Overload Outputs current limited to 0m typical. continuous short circuit will damage the output. Type of Output Protection V Peak Output Voltage (capacitor transient voltage suppressor) Output signal at power-up and power-down 0V External V Power Required m ase Power Required (.0V) m Each channel requires words of V-memory irrespective of the format used. General Specifications Operating Temperature 0 to ( to F) Storage Temperature -0 to 0 (- to F) Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted (EN- pollution degree ) Vibration MIL ST 0. Shock MIL ST 0. Field to Logic side Isolation 00V applied for second (00% tested) Insulation Resistance >0M 00V NEM IS-0; Impulse ms pulse; RFI, Noise Immunity (MHz, 0Mhz cm); Worst case error during noise disturbance is.% of full scale gency pprovals UL0; UL00- Zone Module Location ny slot in a L0 or L0 System Field Wiring Removable Terminal lock Weight g (. oz.) 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 0

172 hapter 0: F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output 0 onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring WRNING: efore removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module, disconnect power to the PL and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to the PL and/or field devices. Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. o not ground the shield at both the module and the source. o not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. heck local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The F0 0H does not supply power to field devices. You will need to power transmitters separately from the PL. To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PL and the field devices. Pull the terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module. You can remove the analog module from the PL by folding out the retaining tabs at the top and bottom of the module. s the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module s connector is lifted out of the PL socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module out of its slot. Terminal lock Specifications Number of Positions Re-Order Number 0-- Pitch. inch (.0 mm) Wire Range -WG Solid or Stranded onductor; Wire strip length /" (-mm) Screwdriver Size (Slotted) 0.T x.w mm (part number N-SS) Screw Size M. size Screw Torque. inch-pounds (. Nm) 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

173 hapter 0: F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output Wiring iagram Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0 0H terminal block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring. Voltage Output h. Voltage Output h. Voltage Output h. Voltage Output h. Voltage Output h. Voltage Output h. Voltage Output h. Voltage Output h. Typical User Wiring SHIEL ONNETE TO SIGNL SOURE OMMON ( OF SHOWN) V Power Supply H H H H OM H H H H OM OM +V 0V Internal Module ircuitry isolated analog circuit common voltage sink / source voltage sink / source voltage sink / source voltage sink / source voltage sink / source voltage sink / source voltage sink / source voltage sink / source H H H H H H H H ISOLTE NLOG IRUIT POWER NLOG 0 0V F0-0H- H H H H OM H H H H OM OM +V 0V 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 0

174 hapter 0: F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output 0 Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence The L0 and L0 will read all eight channels of output data during each scan. Each PU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail beginning in the section on Special V memory Locations. Scan Read Inputs Execute pplication Program Read the data Store data Write to Outputs Scan N Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ L0/L0 PL h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, h,,,,,,, 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

175 hapter 0: F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output Special V-memory Locations Formatting the nalog Module ata The L0 and L0 PLs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option slots. These V-memory locations allow you to: specify the data format (binary or ) specify the number of channels to scan (up to channels for the F0 0H ) specify the V-memory locations where the user program will store the output data pending distribution to the output module L0 ata Formatting The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the L0 PL for the F0 0H. nalog Output Module L0 Special V-memory Locations ata Type and Number of hannels Storage Pointer ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup System memory location V00 is used to set the data format either to or binary and to set the number of channels that will be active. For example, loading a constant of 000 () into V00 sets eight channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a number. lternatively, loading a constant of 00 () into V00 sets eight channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a binary number. V00 V0 Storage Pointer Setup System memory location V0 is used as a pointer. It points to a user memory location where the analog output data is stored by the user program, pending distribution to the output module. n octal number is loaded to the pointer memory to identify the beginning of a block of user memory where output values are stored. For example, loading O00 into V0 causes the PU to look for h s output data value in V00 0, h s data value in V0 0, h s data value in V0 0, h s data value in V0 0, h s data value in V0, h s data value in V, h s data value in V, and h s data value in V. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 on page 0. MS MS V00 setup 0 0 LS 0 V00 binary setup LS 0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 0

176 hapter 0: F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output 0 L0 ata Formatting Special V memory locations are assigned to the four option slots of the L0 PL. The table below shows these V-memory locations which can be used to setup the F0 0H. nalog Output Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. ata Type and Number of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Output Pointer V0 V V V ata Type and Number of ctive hannels Setup System memory locations V00, 0, 0, and 0 are used to set the data format either to or binary and to set the number of channels that will be active. For example, loading a constant of 000 () into V00 sets eight channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a number. lternatively, loading a constant of 00 () into V00 sets eight channels active and causes the output data value to be read from pointer-designated V memory as a binary number. Storage Pointer Setup V memory locations 0,, and are special locations used as storage pointers. V memory address is loaded into this location as an octal number identifying the first user V memory location for the analog output data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O00 causes the pointer to write h s data value to V00 0, h s data value to V0 0, h s data value to V0 0, h s data value to V0 0, h s data value to V0, h s data value to V, h s data value to V, and h s data value to V. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00 and V0 beginning on page 0 0. MS MS V00 setup 0 0 LS 0 V00 binary setup LS 0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

177 hapter 0: F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic The proper use of the L0 pointer requires that the V memory address be written to the special memory location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below. The example program below shows how to setup the special V memory locations. This rung can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the analog output data from V-memory locations. In the example, V00 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K - or - L K V00 L O00 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (up to for the F0-0H-). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data to send to the output module. For example, the O00 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V00-0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0, h V0-0 h V0-, h V-V, h V-V, h V-V. The octal address (O00) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module. L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses the Iox instruction NLG. No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction. nalog Output Module Pointer Setup NLG ase # (K0 - Local) Slot # Number of Output hannels Output ata Format (0 - - IN) Output ata ddress I- K0 K K K0 V00 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 0

178 hapter 0: F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output 0 L0 Pointer Method Using onventional Ladder Logic The proper use of the L0 pointer requires that the V memory address be written to the special memory location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below. Use the special V memory table below as a guide to setup the storage pointer in the following example for the L0. Slot is the left most option slot. nalog Output Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. No. of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Output Pointer V0 V V V The F0 0H can be installed in any available L0 option slot. The ladder diagram below shows how to setup these locations with the module installed in slot of the L0. Use the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This logic is all that is required to write the analog output data from V-memory locations. In the example, V00 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K - or - L K V00 L O00 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of channels (up to for the F0-0H-). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units and the L0 display. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data to send to the output module. For example, the O00 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V00-0, h V0-V0, h V0-V0, h V0-0 h V0-, h V-V, h V-V, h V-V. The octal address (O00) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the first option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module. 0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

179 hapter 0: F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output L0 Pointer Method Using the Iox Instruction vailable in irectsoft The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses the Iox instruction NLG. No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction. Output Scale onversion alculating the igital Output Value Your program has to calculate the digital value to send to the analog output module. Most applications use measurements in engineering units, so it is usually necessary to convert from engineering units to a suitable output value. The conversion to an output value can be accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You will need to substitute the engineering units for your scale into the formula to the right. For example, if you want to output pressure (PSI) between 0.0 and 00.0, you may multiply the pressure value by 0 to store in a V-memory location and eliminate the decimal point. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier. The following example demonstrates how to output. PSI. Example without multiplier U L = H L = = nalog Output Module Pointer Setup NLG ase # (K0 - Local) Slot # Number of Output hannels Output ata Format (0 - - IN) Output ata ddress Example with multiplier = U L H L = = U L H L H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range = nalog value (0 ) = U = Engineering units to output I- K0 K K K0 V00 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 0

180 hapter 0: F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output 0 The onversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have data loaded into the appropriate V- memory locations using instructions that apply for the model of PU you are using. _First Scan SP0 _On SP L K00 V000 L K V00 L V00 MUL V00 IV V000 V00 V00/0 Loads the constant 00 to the accumulator. opies the constant 00 from the accumulator to the memory location V000 and V00. Loads the constant to the accumulator. opies the content of V000 from the accumulator to the memory location V00 and V00. Loads data from V00 and V0. Multiplies the accumulator value by (previously loaded into V00 and V00). ivides the accumulator value by 00 (previously loaded into V000 and V00). opies the content of the accumulator to the memory location V00 and V0. V00/0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

181 hapter 0: F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output nalog and igital Value onversions Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. The formulas in the table show the relationship between, the analog value, and, the digital value. Range If you know the digital value If you know the analog signal level 0 to 0V 0 =. For example, if you need a V signal to achieve the desired result, you can use the formula to determine the digital value that should be used. = = 0 = 0 = 0 V. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 0

182 hapter 0: F0-0H- -h. nalog Voltage Output 0 Module Resolution nalog ata its Two -bit words are reserved for the analog data whether you are using or binary data formatting. The bits in the low word represent the analog data in binary format. MS MS Resolution etails Since the module has -bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into, counts ranging from 0 -, ( ). 0V signal would be 0 and a 0V signal would be. This is equivalent to a binary value of to, or 000 to FFFF hexadecimal. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation: 0V 0V The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LS change in the data value for each increment of the signal change. V Range V00 V00 0 0V LS 0 0 Signal Span (H L) Example LS 0 0 Resolution = ivide y H L H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range Smallest etectable hange 0 to 0V 0 V μv MS inary Example V000 LS MS = data bits 0 V000 LS 0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

183 F0-- -H. IN/-H. NLOG URRENT OMINTION HPTER In This hapter... Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumper onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring iagram Module Operation Special V-memory Locations Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program Scale onversions Module Resolution nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter

184 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination 0 Module Specifications The F0-- nalog ombination module offers the following features: The analog input and output channels are updated in one scan. The removable terminal block makes it possible to remove the module without disconnecting the field wiring. nalog inputs can be used as process variables for the four () PI loops in the L0 and the eight () PI loops in the L0 PUs. On-board active analog filtering and RIS-like microcontroller provide digital signal processing to maintain precise analog measurements in noisy environments. PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX NOTE: The L0 PU s analog feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.00 (or later). See our website for more information: L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

185 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination The following tables provide the specifications for the F0 nalog ombination Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Input Specifications Number of hannels, single ended (one common) Input Range 0 to 0 m or to 0 m (jumper selectable) Resolution bit ( in 0) for 0-0m, scaled for -0m Step Response.0 ms (typ) to % of full step change rosstalk -0 d, / count maximum * ctive Low-pass Filtering - d at 0Hz (- d per octave) Input Impedance Ohm _0.%, / W current input bsolute Maximum Ratings -0 m to +0 m current input onverter type Successive approximation Linearity Error (End to End) ± counts Input Stability ± count * Full Scale alibration Error (Offset error not included) ± 0 counts 0m current input* Offset alibration Error ± counts 0m current input * Maximum Inaccuracy ( F) ±.% 0 to 0 ( to 0 F) ccuracy vs. Temperature ±00 ppm typical full scale calibration (including maximum offset change) Recommended Fuse (external) 0.0 Series fast-acting, current inputs *One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value ( in 0). Output Specifications Number of hannels, single ended (one common) Output Range to 0 m or 0 to 0 m (jumper selectable) Output Type urrent sourcing Resolution bit ( in 0) for 0 to 0 m, scaled for to 0 m Maximum Loop Voltage 0 V Load (ohms)/loop Power Supply 0-00/-0V Linearity Error (end to end) ± counts (± 0.00% of full scale) maximum * onversion Settling Time 00µS max. full scale change Full Scale alibration Error Note: Error depends on the load from source terminal to ground. ± counts 00 load ± counts 0 load ± counts load ± 0 counts 00 load Offset alibration Error ± counts 0 load ± counts load 00 load 0 Max. Full Scale Inaccuracy 0 load 0 %@0 (% of full scale) all errors included load 0 * One count in the specification tables is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value ( in 0). 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

186 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination 0 PL Update Rate -bit ata Word Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental ir Setting the Module Jumper The position of the J jumper determines the input and output signal level. You can choose between 0 0m and 0m signal levels. The module ships without the jumper connecting the pins (pins not jumpered). In this position, the input and output signal level is 0m. To select 0 0m signal level, install the jumper, connecting the pins. The J jumper is shown in the 0m position (not installed). Install the jumper for the 0 0m position. General Specifications input channels per scan, output channels per scan binary data bits 0 to 0 ( to 0 F) -0 to 0 (- to F) to % (non-condensing) No corrosive gases permitted Vibration MIL ST 0. Shock MIL ST 0. Noise Immunity Power udget Requirement onnector onnector Wire Size onnector Screw Torque onnector Screwdriver Size NEM IS-0 00 V (supplied by base) Phoenix Mecano, Inc., Part No. K0/-. - green - WG 0. Nm N-SS (recommended) WRNING: efore removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module, disconnect power to the PL and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to the PL and/or field devices. J L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

187 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. o not ground the shield at both the module and the source. o not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. heck local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. separate transmitter power supply may be required, depending on the type of transmitter being used. This module has a removable connector to make wiring and module removal easier. To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PL and the field devices. Pull the terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module. The analog module can be removed from the PL by folding out the retaining tabs at the top and bottom of the module. s the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module s connector is lifted out of the PL socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module out of its slot. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

188 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination 0 Wiring iagram Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the terminal block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring. Typical User Wiring See NOTE Internal Module H Wiring wire urrent + nalog In/Out Transmitter IN In/ Out H 0 0m wire 0m urrent + Transmitter H + wire IN + urrent Transmitter + H wire + to urrent onverter 0V Transmitter H load maximum Resistance H load maximum Resistance NOTE : Shields should be grounded at the signal source. NOTE : onnect all external power supply commons. + Transmitter Power Supply V OV nalog Switch 0V +V F0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

189 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination Module Operation Input/Output hannel Update Sequence The L0 and L0 will read four channels of input data and two channels of output data during each scan. Each PU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail beginning on the next page, Special V memory Locations. Scan Read Inputs Execute pplication Program Read the data Store data Write to Outputs nalog Module Updates Even though the channel updates to the PU are synchronous with the PU scan, the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signals and converts each signal into a -bit binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program. Scan N Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ L0/L0 PL h,,, IN; h, h,,, IN; h, h,,, IN; h, h,,, IN; h, h,,, IN; h, The module takes approximately milliseconds to sense % of the change in the analog signal. For the vast majority of applications, the process changes are much slower than these updates. NOTE: If you are comparing other manufacturers update times (step responses) with ours, please be aware that some manufacturers refer to the time it takes to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Our analog to digital conversion takes only a few microseconds. It is the settling time of the filter that is critical in determining the full update time. Our update time specification includes the filter settling time. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

190 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination 0 Special V-memory Locations Formatting themodule ata The L0 and L0 PLs have three special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option slots. These V-memory locations allow you to: specify the data format (binary or ) specify the number of input and output channels to scan. specify the V-memory locations to store the input data specify the V-memory locations to store the output data L0 ata Formatting The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the L0 PL for the analog combination module. nalog ombination Module L0 Special V-memory Locations ata Type and Number of I/O hannels Input Storage Pointer Output Storage Pointer Structure of V00 V memory location 00 is used for identifying the number of output channels, the number of input channels and the data type (binary or ). The low byte equals the number of output channels and the high byte equals the number of input channels. Enter a through to select the number of input channels and a through to select the number of output channels to be used. zero (0) entered for channel selection will cause the channel, either input or output, to be inoperative. Loading a constant of 0 into V00 identifies four input and two output analog channels, and sets the I/O data type to. Loading a constant of into V00 identifies four input and two output analog channels, and sets the I/O data type to binary. Structure of V0 V0 is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing analog input data. The V memory location loaded in V0 is an octal number identifying the first V- memory location for the analog input data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O000 causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000, h s data value to V00, H s data value to V00 and h s data value to V00. MS MS V00 V0 V0 HIGH YTE LS LOW YTE LS L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

191 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination Structure of V0 V0 is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing analog output data. The V memory location loaded in V0 is an octal number identifying the first V- memory location for the analog output data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O00 causes the pointer to read h s data value at V00 and h s data value at V0. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00, V0and V0 on page. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

192 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination 0 L0 ata Formatting Special V-memory locations are assigned to the four option module slots of the L0 PL. The table below shows these V memory locations which can be used by the F0. nalog ombination Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. ata Type and Number of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Input Storage Pointer V0 V V V Output Storage Pointer V0 V V V Setup ata Type and Number of hannels V memory locations 00, 0, 0 and 0 are used to set the number of output channels, the number of input channels and the data type (binary or ). The low byte equals the number of output channels and the high byte equals the number of input channels. Enter a through to select the number of input channels and a through to select the number of output channels to be used. zero (0) entered for channel selection will cause the channel, either input or output, to be inoperative. onsider the F0 to be installed in slot. Loading a constant of 0 into V0 identifies four input and two output analog channels, and sets the I/O data type to. Loading a constant of into V0 identifies four input and two output analog channels, and sets the I/O data type to binary. Input Storage Pointer Setup V memory locations 0,, and are special locations used as a storage pointer for the analog input data. With the analog module installed in slot, the V memory location loaded in V is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location to write the analog input data to. This V memory location is userselectable. For example, loading O000 causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000, h s data value to V00, H s data value to V00 and h s data value to V00. Output Storage Pointer Setup V memory locations 0,, and are special locations used as a storage pointer for the analog output data. With the analog module installed in slot, the V memory location loaded in V is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location to read the analog output data from. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O00 causes the pointer to read h s data value at V00 and h s data value at V0. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V0, V and V on page. MS MS HIGH YTE LS LOW YTE LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

193 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method The L0 PU examines the pointer values (the memory locations identified in V00, V0 and V0) on the first scan only. The example program below shows how to setup these locations for input channels and output cahneels. This rung can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the analog input and output data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V000 and V00 are used in the example, the V-memory locations are user selectable. SP0 L K0 - or - L K V00 L O000 V0 L O00 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte selects the input data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of input channels (set to ). The lower byte selects the output data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of output channels (set to ). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V000, h V00, h V00, h V00 The octal address (O000) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the output data. For example, the O00 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V00, h V0 The octal address (O00) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to get the output data. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

194 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination 0 L0 Pointer Method Use the special V memory table as a guide to setup the pointer values in the following example for the L0. Slot is the left most option slot. The PU will examine the pointer values at these locations only after a mode transition, first scan only. The F0 can be installed in any available L0 option slot. Using the example program from the previous page, but changing the V memory addresses, the ladder diagram below shows how to setup these locations for input channels and output channels with the module installed in slot of the L0. Use the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. Like the L0 example, this logic is all that is required to read the analog input data into V- memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathmatical calculations with the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V000 and V00 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 nalog ombination Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. No. of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Input Pointer V0 V V V Output Pointer V0 V V V L K0 - or - L K V0 L O000 V L O00 V L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte selects the input data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of input channels (set to ). The lower byte selects the output data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of output channels (set to ). The binary format can be used for displaying data on some operator interface units and on the L0 L display. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location, V0, assigned to the option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V000, h V00, h V00, h V00 The octal address (O000) is stored here. V is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the output data. For example, the O00 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V00, h V0 The octal address (O00) is stored here. V is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to get the output data.

195 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination Scale onversions Scaling the Input ata Many applications call for measurements in engineering units, which can be more meaningful than raw data. onvert to engineering units using the formula shown to the right. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units. For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 00.0 then you would have to multiply the analog value by 0 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier. nalog Value of 0, slightly less than half scale, should yield. PSI Example without multiplier Units = Units = Units = H L + L Units = Example with multiplier Units = 0 H L Units = Units = H L + L H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range = nalog value (0 ) + L L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

196 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination 0 The onversion Program The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion from input data formats 0 0. This example assumes the raw input data read at V000 is in format. Note: this example uses SP, which is always on. You could also use an X,, etc. permissive contact. SP L V000 Output onversion Program The following example program shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion to output data formats 0 0. This example assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values between in format and stored them in V00 and V0 for channels and respectively. oth the L0 and L0 offer instructions that allow you to perform math operations using format. It is usually easier to perform any math calculations in and then convert the value to binary before you send the data to the module. SP SP MUL K000 IV K0 V00 L V00 MUL K0 IV K000 V00 L V0 MUL K0 IV K000 V0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 When SP is on, load channel data to the accumulator (for a range of 0 000). Multiply the accumulator by 000. ivide the accumulator by 0 (the module resolution). Store the result in V00. The L instruction loads the engineering units used with channel into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are. Since SP is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X,, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 0. ivide the accumulator by 000 (this is the maximum value of V00). Store the result in V00; the V memory location set up to send the data to h output. The L instruction loads the engineering units used with h into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are. Since SP is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X,, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 0. ivide the accumulator by 000 (this is the maximum value of V0). Store the result in V0; the V memory location set up to send the data to h output.

197 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination nalog and igital Value onversions Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following tables provide formulas to make this conversion easier. Range If you know the digital value If you know the analog signal level to 0m = + 0 For example, if you have measured the signal as 0m, you can use the formula to determine the digital value () that will be stored in the V-memory location that contains the data. This example shows the result for the 0 to 0m range. = 0 ( - ) = 0 ( ) = 0 (0m ) = (.) () = Range If you know the digital value If you know the analog signal level 0 to 0m = 0 0 = 0 () 0 = 0 0 () = 0 0 (0m) = (0.) (0) = 0. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

198 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination 0 Module Resolution nalog ata its The first twelve bits represent the analog data in binary format. it Value it Value Resolution etails Since the module has -bit resolution, the analog signal is converted from 0 counts ranging from 0 0 (). For example, a m signal would be 0 and 0m signal would be 0. This is equivalent to a binary value of to, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. The diagrams below show how this relates to the two signal ranges. 0m m 0m 0m 0m 0 ounts 0 0 0m 0 ounts 0 MS Resolution = H L 0 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range 0 m / 0 =.0μ per count 0m / 0 =.μ per count LS = data bits 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

199 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Please refer to the PI Loop Operation chapter in the L0 or L0 User Manual for information on the built-in PV filter (L0/0) and the ladder logic filter (L0 only) shown below. filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PI loops to prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics. Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help stabilize PI loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator interface display, etc. Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters to smooth the analog input signal. Using inary ata Format SP L V000 TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V00 Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format and has been loaded from V memory location V000 00, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increase filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering.) dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Loads the binary number filtered value from the accumulator into location V00 to use in your application or PI loop. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

200 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog urrent ombination 0 NOTE: e careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method in format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (IN) as shown below. If you are using the pointer method in inary format, the conversion to binary (IN) instruction is not needed. SP Using ata Format L V000 IN TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V0 Loads the analog signal, which is in format and has been loaded from V memory location V000, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts the value in the accumulator to binary. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increase filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering.) dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a number. Note: The instruction is not needed to PI loop PV (loop PV is a binary number). Loads the number filtered value from the accumulator into location V0 to use in your application or PI loop. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

201 F0-- -H. IN/-H. NLOG VOLTGE OMINTION HPTER In This hapter... Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumpers onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring iagram Module Operation Special V-memory Locations Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program Scale onversions Module Resolution nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter

202 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 Module Specifications The F0-- nalog ombination module offers the following features: The analog input and output channels are updated in one scan. The module has a removable terminal block which makes it possible to remove the module without disconnecting the field wiring. nalog inputs can be used as process variables for the four () PI loops in the L0 and the eight () PI loops in the L0 PUs. On-board active analog filtering and RIS-like microcontroller provide digital signal processing to maintain precise analog measurements in noisy environments. NOTE: The L0 PU s analog feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.00 (or later). See our website for more information: L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

203 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination The following tables provide the specifications for the F0 nalog Voltage ombination Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Input Specifications Number of hannels, single ended (one common) Input Range 0 to V or 0 to 0 V (jumper selectable) Resolution bit ( in 0) Step Response 0.0 ms to % of full step change rosstalk / count maximum (-0db)* ctive Low-pass Filtering - d at 00Hz (- d per octave) Input Impedance Greater than 0K bsolute Maximum Ratings ± V Linearity Error (End to End) ± counts (0.0% of full scale) maximum* Input Stability ± count * Gain Error ± counts * Offset Error ± counts * Maximum Inaccuracy ( F) 0.% 0 to 0 ( to 0 F) ccuracy vs. Temperature ±00 ppm/ typical Output Specifications Number of hannels, single ended (one common) Output Range 0 to V or 0 to 0 V (jumper selectable) Resolution bit ( in 0) onversion Settling Time 0µS for full scale change rosstalk / count maximum (-0db) * Peak Output Voltage ± V (power supply limited) Offset Error 0.% of range Gain Error 0.% of range Linearity Error (end to end) ± count (0.0% of full scale) maximum* Output Stability ± counts* Load Impedance K minimum Load apacitance 0.0 µf maximum ccuracy vs. Temperature ±0 ppm/ typical * One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value ( in 0). 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

204 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 PL Update Rate Setting the Module Jumpers The position of the J jumpers determines the input and output signal levels. You can choose between 0 V or 0 0 V. The module ships with the jumpers connecting the pins. In this position, the input and output signal level is 0 V. To select 0 0 V signals, use the jumper setting chart located on the module. One or more channels can be selected for 0 0 V input and output signal level by removing the jumper from the connecting pins of the appropriate channel. This will allow you to have one channel selected for a 0 V signal and another channel selected for a 0 0 V signal. J, jumpers shown below, are configured as, H INPUT and H PUT both set for 0V. H INPUT and H PUT both set for V. Refer to jumper setting chart. General Specifications input channels per scan output channels per scan -bit ata Word binary data bits Operating Temperature 0 to 0 ( to 0 F) Storage Temperature -0 to 0 (- to F) Relative Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental ir No corrosive gases permitted Vibration MIL ST 0. Shock MIL ST 0. Noise Immunity NEM IS-0 Power udget Requirement 0 V (supplied by base) External Power Supply 0 m, V ±0% onnector Phoenix Mecano, Inc. Part No. K0/-. - green onnector Wire Size - WG onnector Screw Torque 0. Nm onnector Screwdriver Size N-SS (recommended) 0 ON=V INPUT H WRNING: efore removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module, disconnect power to the PL and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to the PL and/or field devices. H H H J (JUMPERS) F0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

205 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. o not ground the shield at both the module and the source. o not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. heck local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The F0 will require an external power supply with a rating of.0.v at 0 m. To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PL and the field devices. Pull the terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module. You can remove the analog module from the PL by folding out the retaining tabs at the top and bottom of the module. s the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module s connector is lifted out of the PL socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module out of its slot. Wiring iagram Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0 terminal block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring. Typical User Wiring H wire + Voltage Transmitter H wire Voltage Transmitter H load k ohms minimum Resistance H load k ohms minimum Resistance See NOTE + + NOTE : Shields should be grounded at the signal source. NOTE : onnect all external power supply commons. Transmitter Power Supply V Power Supply IN 0V 0V V+ V 0V Internal Module Wiring OV nalog Switch to onverter nalog In/Out In/ Out 0 V 0 0V IN 0V 0V V+ V 0V F0 0 Module Supply L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

206 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 Module Operation Input/Output hannel Scanning Sequence The L0 and L0 read two channels of input and two channels of output data during each scan. The PU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail on the following page, Special V memory Locations. Scan Read Inputs Execute pplication Program Read the data Store data Write to Outputs nalog Module Updates Even though the channel updates to the PU are synchronous with the PU scan, the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signals and converts each signal into a -bit binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program. Scan N Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ L0/L0 PL h, IN; h, h, IN; h, h, IN; h, h, IN; h, h, IN; h, The module takes approximately 0 milliseconds to sense % of the change in the analog signal. For the vast majority of applications, the process changes are much slower than these updates. NOTE: If you are comparing other manufacturers update times (step responses) with ours, please be aware that some manufacturers refer to the time it takes to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Our analog to digital conversion takes only a few microseconds. It is the settling time of the filter that is critical in determining the full update time. Our update time specification includes the filter settling time. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

207 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination Special V-memory Locations Formatting the Module ata The L0 and L0 PLs have three special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option slots These V-memory locations allow you to: specify the data format (binary or ) specify the number of I/O channels to scan ( input and output channels for the F0 ) specify the V-memory locations to store the input data specify the V-memory locations to store the output data L0 ata Formatting The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the L0 PL for the analog combination modules. nalog ombination Module L0 Special V-memory Locations ata Type and Number of I/O hannels Input Storage Pointer Output Storage Pointer Structure of V00 V memory location 00 is used for identifying the number of output channels, the number of input channels and the data type (binary or ). The low byte equals the number of output channels and the high byte equals the number of input channels. Either a or a will be entered to select the number of input and output channels to be used. zero (0) entered for channel selection will cause the channel, either input or output, to be inoperative. Loading a constant of 0 into V00 identifies two input and two output analog channels, and sets the I/O data type to. Loading a constant of into V00 identifies two input and two output analog channels, and sets the I/O data type to binary. V00 V0 V0 Structure of V0 V0 is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing analog input data. The V memory location loaded in V0 is an octal number identifying the first V- memory location for the analog input data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O000, using the L instruction,causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000 and h s data value to V00. MS MS HIGH YTE LS LOW YTE LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

208 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 Structure of V0 V0 is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing analog output data. The V memory location loaded in V0 is an octal number identifying the first V- memory location for the analog output data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O00, using the L instruction, causes the pointer to write h s datavalue from V00 and h s data value from V0. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00, V0 and V0 on page 0. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

209 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination L0 ata Formatting Special V memory locations are assigned to the four option module slots of the L0 PL. The table below shows these V memory locations which can be used by the F0. nalog ombination Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. Number of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Input Pointer V0 V V V Output Pointer V0 V V V Setup ata Type and Number of hannels V memory locations 00, 0, 0 and 0 are used for identifying the number of output channels, the number of input channels and the data type (binary or ). The low byte equals the number of output channels and the high byte equals the number of input channels. Enter a or to select the number of input and output channels to be used. zero (0) entered for channel selection will cause the channel, either input or output, to be inoperative. For example, with a module installed in slot by loading a constant of 0 into V00 identifies two input and two output analog channels, and sets the I/O data type to. nd, loading a constant of into V00 identifies two input and two output analog channels, and sets the I/O data type to binary. Input Storage Pointer V memory locations 0,, and are special locations used as a storage pointers for the analog input data. With the analog module installed in slot, the V memory location loaded in V0 is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location to read the analog input data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O000, using the L instruction, causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000 and h s data value to V00. Output Storage Pointer V memory locations 0,, and are special locations used as storage pointer for the analog output data. With the analog module installed in slot, the V memory location loaded in V0 is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location to write the analog output data to. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O00, using the L instruction, causes the pointer to write h s data value from V00 and h s data value from V0. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00, V0 and V0 on page. MS MS HIGH YTE LS LOW YTE LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

210 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method The L0 PU examines the pointer values (the memory locations identified in V00, V0 and V0) on the first scan only. The example program below shows how to setup these locations for input channels and output channels. This rung can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations with the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V000 and V00 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K0 - or - L K V00 L O000 V0 L O00 V0 Load a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte selects the input data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of input channels (set to either or for the F0 ). The lower byte selects the output data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of output channels (set to either or ). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here using the L instruction would designate the following addresses: h V000, h V00 The octal address (O000) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the output data. For example, the O00 entered here using the L instruction would designate the following addresses: h V00, h V0 The octal address (O00) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output data. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

211 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination L0 Pointer Method Use the special V memory table as a guide to setup the pointer values in the following example for the L0. Slot is the left most option slot. The PU will examine the pointer values at these locations only after a mode transition, first scan only. The F0 can be installed in any available L0 option slot. Using the example program from the previous page, but changing the V memory addresses, the ladder diagram below shows how to setup these locations for input channels and output channels with the module installed in slot of the L0. Use the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. Like the L0 example, this logic is all that is required to read the analog input data into V- memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathmatical calculations with the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V000 and V00 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 nalog ombination Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. Number of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Input Pointer V0 V V V Output Pointer V0 V V V L K0 - or - L K V00 L O000 V0 L O00 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte selects the input data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of input channels (set to either or for the F0 ). The lower byte selects the output data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of output channels (set to either or ). The binary format can be used for displaying data on some operator interface units and on the L0 L display. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, O000 entered here using the L instruction would designate the following addresses: h V000, h V00 The octal address (O000) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the first option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the output data. For example, O00 entered here using the L instruction would designate the following addresses: h V00, h V0 The octal address (O00) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the first first slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output data. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 0

212 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 Scale onversions Scaling the Input ata Many applications call for measurements in engineering units, which can be more meaningful than raw data. onvert to engineering units using the formula shown to the right. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units. Units = H L 0 For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 00.0 then you would have to multiply the analog value by 0 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier. nalog Value of 0, slightly less than half scale, should yield. PSI. Example without multiplier Units = H L + L 0 Units = Units = + 0 Handheld isplay V 00 V L H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range = nalog value (0 0) Example with multiplier Units = 0 H L 0 Units = Units = + L Handheld isplay + 0 V 00 V This value is more accurate L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

213 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination The onversion Program The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion from the input data format 0 0. This example assumes the raw input data read at V000 is in format. Note: this example uses SP, which is always on. You could also use an X,, etc. permissive contact. SP L V000 Output onversion Program The following example program shows how you would write the program to convert the engineering unit to the output data format 0 0. This example assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values between in format and stored them in V00 and V0 for channels and respectively. oth the L0 and L0 offer instructions that allow you to perform math operations using format. It is usually easier to perform any math calculations in and then convert the value to binary before you send the data to the module. SP SP MUL K000 IV K0 V00 L V00 MUL K0 IV K000 V00 L V0 MUL K0 IV K000 V0 When SP is on, load h data to the accumulator. Multiply the accumulator by 000 (for the range of 0 000). ivide the accumulator by 0(the module resolution). Store the result in V00. The L instruction loads the engineering units used with channel into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are. Since SP is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X,, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 0. ivide the accumulator by 000 (this is the maximum value of V00). Store the result in V00; the V memory location set up to send the data to h output. The L instruction loads the engineering units used with h into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are. Since SP is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X,, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 0. ivide the accumulator by 000 (this is the maximum value of V0). Store the result in V0; the V memory location set up to send the data to h output. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

214 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 nalog and igital Value onversions Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. Range If you know the digital value If you know the analog signal level 0 to V = 0 0 to 0V = 0 0 For example, if you are using the 0 0V range and you need a V signal level, use this formula to determine the digital value () that will be stored in the V-memory location that contains the data. = 0 () = 0 () 0 = 0 0 () = 0 0 (V) = (0.) () = L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

215 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination Module Resolution nalog ata its The first twelve bits represent the analog data for both inputs and outputs in binary format. it Value it Value Resolution etails Since the module has -bit resolution for both inputs and outputs, the analog signal is either converted into 0 counts or a count value will produce a proportional analog output. In either situation the count range will be from 0 0 ( ). For example, with an output range of 0 to 0V, send a 0 to get a 0V signal, and send 0 to get a 0V signal. This is equivalent to a binary value of to, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation: 0V 0 0V 0V 0 0 MS The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LS change in the data or the amount of change in the output signal that each increment of the count value will produce. 0 Resolution = H L 0 LS = data bits H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range Voltage Range Signal Span ivide y 0 Smallest detectable or Produced hange 0 to V volts 0. mv 0 to 0V 0 volts 0. mv 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

216 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Please refer to the PI Loop Operation chapter in the L0 or L0 User Manual for information on the built-in PV filter (L0/0) and the ladder logic filter (L0 only) shown below. filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PI loops to prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics. Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help stabilize PI loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator interface display, etc. Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters to smooth the analog input signal. Using inary ata Format SP L V000 TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V0 Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format and has been loaded from V-memory location V000, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increases filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering). dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Loads the binary number filtered value from the accumulator into location V0 to use in your application or PI loop. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

217 hapter : F0-- -h. In/-h. Out nalog Voltage ombination NOTE: e careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method in format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (IN) as shown below. If you are using the pointer method in inary format, the conversion to binary (IN) instruction is not needed. Using ata Format SP L V000 IN TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V0 Loads the analog signal, which is in format and has been loaded from V-memory location V000, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts a value in the accumulator to binary. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increases filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering). dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a number. Note: The instruction is not needed for PI loop PV (loop PV is a binary number). Loads the number filtered value from the accumulator into location V0 to use in your application or PI loop. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

218 F0-- -H. IN/-H. NLOG HPTER VOLTGE OMINTION In This hapter... Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumpers onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring iagram Module Operation Special V-memory Locations Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program Scale onversions Module Resolution nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter

219 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 Module Specifications The F0-- nalog ombination module offers the following features: The analog input and output channels are updated in one scan. The removable terminal block makes it possible to remove the module without disconnecting the field wiring. nalog inputs can be used as process variables for the four () PI loops in the L0 PU and the eight () PI loops in the L0 PUs. On-board active analog filtering and RIS-like microcontroller provide digital signal processing to maintain precise analog measurements in noisy environments. NOTE: The L0 PU s analog feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.00 (or later). See our website for more information: L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

220 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination The following tables provide the specifications for the F0 nalog ombination Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Input Specifications Number of hannels, single ended (one common) Input Range 0 to V or 0 to 0 V (jumper selectable) Resolution bit ( in 0) Step Response 0.0 ms to % of full step change rosstalk -0 d, / count maximum* ctive Low-pass Filtering - d at 00Hz (- d per octave) Input Impedance Greater than 0K bsolute Maximum Ratings ± V Linearity Error (End to End) ± counts maximum* Input Stability ± count * Gain Error ± counts maximum * Offset Error ± counts maximum* Maximum Inaccuracy ( F) ±0.% 0 to 0 ( to 0 F) ccuracy vs. Temperature ±00 ppm/ typical Output Specifications Number of hannels, single ended (one common) Output Range 0 to V or 0 to 0 V (jumper selectable) Resolution bit ( in 0) onversion Settling Time 0µS for full scale change rosstalk -0 db, / count maximum* Peak Output Voltage ± V (power supply limited) Offset Error 0.% of range Gain Error 0.% of range Linearity Error (end to end) ± count (0.0% of full scale) maximum* Output Stability ± counts* Load Impedance K maximum Load apacitance 0.0 µf maximum ccuracy vs. Temperature ±0 ppm/ typical * One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value ( in 0). 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

221 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 PL Update Rate Setting the Module Jumpers The position of the J jumpers determines the input and output signal levels. You can choose between 0 V or 0 0V. The module ships with the jumpers installed connecting the pins. In this position, the input and output signal level is 0 V. To select 0 0V signals, use the jumper selection chart located on the module. One or more channels can be selected for 0 0 V input and output signal level by removing the jumper from the connecting pin of the appropriate channel. This will allow you to have one channel selected for a 0 V signal and another channel selected for a 0 0 V signal. J, jumpers shown below, are configured as, H and H INPUTs and H PUT set for 0V. H and H INPUTs and H PUT set for V. Refer to jumper selection chart. General Specifications input channels per scan output channels per scan -bit ata Word binary data bits Operating Temperature 0 to 0 ( to 0 F) Storage Temperature -0 to 0 (- to F) Relative Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental ir No corrosive gases permitted Vibration MIL ST 0. Shock MIL ST 0. Noise Immunity NEM IS-0 Power udget Requirement 00 V (supplied by base) onnector Phoenix Mecano, Inc. Part No. K0/-. - green onnector Wire Size - WG onnector Screw Torque 0. Nm onnector Screwdriver Size N-SS (recommended) H H H INPUTS H H H PUTS ON=0 V RNGE WRNING: efore removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module, disconnect power to the PL and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to the PL and/or field devices. J L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

222 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. o not ground the shield at both the module and the source. o not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. heck local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. separate transmitter power supply may be required, depending on the type of transmitter being used. This module has a removable connector to make wiring and module removal easier. To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PL and the field devices. Pull the terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module. The analog module can be removed from the PL by folding out the retaining tabs at the top and bottom of the module. s the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module s connector is lifted out of the PL socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module out of its slot. Wiring iagram Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the terminal block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring. Typical User Wiring See NOTE Internal Module H Wiring wire Voltage + nalog In/Out Transmitter IN In/ Out H 0 V wire 0 0V Voltage + Transmitter + H wire IN + Voltage Transmitter + H wire + to Voltage onverter 0V Transmitter H load k ohms minimum Resistance H load k ohms minimum Resistance NOTE : Shields should be grounded at the signal source. NOTE : onnect all external power supply commons. + Transmitter Power Supply 0V OV nalog Switch F0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 0V 0V 0

223 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 Module Operation Input/Output hannel Update Sequence The L0 and L0 read four channels of input data and two channels of output data during each scan. The PU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail on the next page, Special V memory Locations. Scan Read Inputs Execute pplication Program Read the data Store data Write to Outputs Scan N Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ L0/L0 PL h,,, IN; h, h,,, IN; h, h,,, IN; h, h,,, IN; h, h,,, IN; h, nalog Module Updates Even though the channel updates to the PU are synchronous with the PU scan, the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signals and converts each signal into a -bit binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program. The module takes approximately 0 milliseconds to sense % of the change in the analog signal. For the vast majority of applications, the process changes are much slower than these updates. NOTE: If you are comparing other manufacturers update times (step responses) with ours, please be aware that some manufacturers refer to the time it takes to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Our analog to digital conversion takes only a few microseconds. It is the settling time of the filter that is critical in determining the full update time. Our update time specification includes the filter settling time. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

224 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination Special V-memory Locations Formatting the Module ata The L0 and L0 PLs have three special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option slots. These V-memory locations allow you to: specify the data format (binary or ) specify the number of input and output channels to scan. specify the V-memory locations to store the input data specify the V-memory locations to store the output data L0 ata Formatting The table below shows the special V-memory locations which are used by the L0 PL for the F0. nalog ombination Module L0 Special V-memory Locations ata Type and Number of I/O hannels Input Storage Pointer Output Storage Pointer Structure of V00 V memory location 00 is used for identifying the number of output channels, the number of input channels and the data type (binary or ). The low byte equals the number of output channels and the high byte equals the number of input channels. Enter a through to select the number of input channels and a through to select the number of output channels to be used. zero (0) entered for channel selection will cause the channel, either input or output, to be inoperative. Loading a constant of 0 into V00 identifies four input and two output analog channels, and sets the I/O data type to. Loading a constant of into V00 identifies four input and two output analog channels, and sets the I/O data type to binary. V00 V0 V0 Structure of V0 V0 is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing analog input data. The V memory location loaded in V0 is an octal number identifying the first V- memory location for the analog input data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O000 using the L instruction causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000, h s data value to V00, H s data value to V00 and h s data value to V00. MS MS HIGH YTE LS LOW YTE LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

225 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 Structure of V0 V0 is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing analog output data. The V memory location loaded in V0 is an octal number identifying the first V- memory location for the analog output data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O00 using the L instruction causes the pointer to read h s data value at V00 and h s data value at V0. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00, V0 and V0 on page 0. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

226 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination L0 ata Formatting Special V memory locations are assigned to the four option module slots of the L0 PL. The table below shows these V memory locations which can be used for the F0. nalog ombination Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. Number of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Input Pointer V0 V V V Output Pointer V0 V V V Setup ata Type and Number of hannels V memory location 00, 0, 0 and 0 are used for identifying the number of output channels, the number of input channels and the data type (binary or ). The low byte equals the number of output channels and the high byte equals the number of input channels. Enter a through to select the number of input channels and a or to select the number of output channels to be used. zero (0) entered for channel selection will cause the channel, either input or output, to be inoperative. For example, with a module installed in slot by loading a constant of 0 into V0 identifies four input and two output analog channels, and sets the I/O data type to. Or, loading a constant of into V0 identifies four input and two output analog channels, and sets the I/O data type to binary. Input Storage Pointer Setup V-memory locations 0,, and are special locations used as storage pointers for the analog input data. With the analog module installed in slot, the V memory location loaded in V, for instance, is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location to read the analog input data. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O000 using the L instruction causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000, h s data value to V00, H s data value to V00 and h s data value to V00. Output Storage Pointer Setup V-memory locations 0,, and are special locations used as storage pointers for the analog output data. With the analog module installed in slot, the V memory location loaded in V is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location to write the analog output data to. This V memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O00 using the L instruction causes the pointer to read h s data value at V00 and h s data value at V0. You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V00, V0 and V0 on page. MS MS HIGH YTE LS LOW YTE LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

227 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 Using the Pointer in Your ontrol Program L0 Pointer Method The L0 PU examines the pointer values (the memory locations identified in V00, V0 and V0) on the first scan only. The example program below shows how to setup these locations for input channels and output channels. This rung can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V000 and V00 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K0 - or - L K V00 L O000 V0 L O00 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte selects the input data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of input channels (set to ). The lower byte selects the output data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of output channels (set to ). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V000, h V00, h V00, h V00 The octal address (O000) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the output data. For example, the O00 entered here would designate the following addresses: h V00, h V0 The octal address (O00) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to get the output data. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

228 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination L0 Pointer Method Use the special V memory table as a guide to setup the pointer values in the following example for the L0. Slot is the left most option slot. The PU will examine the pointer values at these locations only after a mode transition, first scan only. The F0 can be installed in any available L0 option slot. Using the example program from the previous page, but changing the V memory addresses, the ladder diagram below shows how to setup these locations for input channels and output channels with the module installed in slot of the L0. Use the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. Like the L0 example, this logic is all that is required to read the analog input data into V- memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathmatical calculations with the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V000 and V00 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 nalog ombination Module L0 Special V-memory Locations Slot No. Number of hannels V00 V0 V0 V0 Input Pointer V0 V V V Output Pointer V0 V V V L K0 - or - L K V00 L O000 V0 L O00 V0 Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte selects the input data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of input channels (set to ). The lower byte selects the output data format (i.e. 0=, =inary) and the number of output channels (set to ). The binary format can be used for displaying data on some operator interface units and on the L0 L display. The L0 PLs support binary math functions. Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, O000 entered here using the L instruction would designate the following addresses: h V000, h V00, h V00, h V00 The octal address (O000) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the first option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the output data. For example, O00 entered here using the L instruction would designate the following addresses: h V00, h V0 The octal address (O00) is stored here. V0 is assigned to the first option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output data. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

229 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 Scale onversions Scaling the Input ata Many applications call for measurements in engineering units, which can be more meaningful than raw data. onvert to engineering units using the formula shown to the right. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units. For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 00.0 then you would have to multiply the analog value by 0 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier. nalog Value of 0, slightly less than half scale, should yield. PSI Example without multiplier Units = H L 0 Units = Units = + L + 0 Handheld isplay V 00 V Example with multiplier Units = 0 H L 0 Units = Units = Units = H L 0 + L Handheld isplay L H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range = nalog value (0 0) V 00 V This value is more accurate L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

230 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination The onversion Program The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion from input data formats 0 0. This example assumes the raw input data read at V000 is in format. Note: this example uses SP, which is always on. You could also use an X,, etc. permissive contact. SP Output onversion Program The following example program shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion to output data formats 0 0. This example assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values between in format and stored them in V00 and V0 for channels and respectively. The L0 and L0 offer instructions that allow you to perform math operations using format. It is usually easier to perform any math calculations in and then convert the value to binary before you send the data to the module. SP SP L V000 MUL K000 IV K0 V00 L V00 MUL K0 IV K000 V00 L V0 MUL K0 IV K000 V0 When SP is on, load channel data to the accumulator (for a range of 0 000). Multiply the accumulator by 000. ivide the accumulator by 0 (the module resolution). Store the result in V00. The L instruction loads the engineering units used with channel into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are. Since SP is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X,, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 0. ivide the accumulator by 000 (this is the maximum value of V00). Store the result in V00; the V memory location set up to send the data to h output. The L instruction loads the engineering units used with h into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are. Since SP is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X,, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 0. ivide the accumulator by 000 (this is the maximum value of V0). Store the result in V0; the V memory location set up to send the data to h output. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

231 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 nalog and igital Value onversions Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. Range If you know the digital value If you know the analog signal level 0 to V = 0 0 to 0V = 0 0 For example, if you are using the 0 0V range and you need a V signal level, use this formula to determine the digital value () that will be stored in the V-memory location that contains the data. = 0 () = 0 () 0 = 0 0 () = 0 0 (V) = (0.) () = L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

232 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination Module Resolution nalog ata its The first twelve bits represent the analog data for both inputs and outputs in binary format. it Value it Value Resolution etails Since the module has -bit resolution for both inputs and outputs, the analog signal is either converted into 0 counts or a count value will produce a proportional analog output. In either situation the count range will be from 0 0 ( ). For example, with an output range of 0 to 0V, send a 0 to get a 0V signal, and send 0 to get a 0V signal. This is equivalent to a binary value of to, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation: 0V 0 0V 0V 0 0 MS Resolution = H L 0 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LS change in the data or the amount of change in the output signal that each increment of the count value will produce. Voltage Range Signal Span ivide y 0 Smallest etectable or Produced hange 0 to V volts 0. mv 0 to 0V 0 volts 0. mv LS = data bits 0 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

233 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination 0 nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Please refer to the PI Loop Operation chapter in the L0 or L0 User Manual for information on the built-in PV filter (L0/0) and the ladder logic filter (L0 only) shown below. filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PI loops to prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics. Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help stabilize PI loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator interface display, etc. Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters to smooth the analog input signal. Using inary ata Format SP L V000 TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V0 Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format and has been loaded from V-memory location V000, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increases filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering). dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Loads the binary number filtered value from the accumulator into location V0 to use in your application or PI loop. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

234 hapter : F0-- -h. In/ h. Out nalog Voltage ombination NOTE: e careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method in format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (IN) as shown below. If you are using the pointer method in inary format, the conversion to binary (IN) instruction is not needed. Using ata Format SP L V000 IN TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V0 Loads the analog signal, which is in format and has been loaded from V-memory location V000, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts a value in the accumulator to binary. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increases filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering). dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a number. Note: The instruction is not needed for PI loop PV (loop PV is a binary number). Loads the number filtered value from the accumulator into location V0 to use in your application or PI loop. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

235 F0-0RT -HNNEL RT INPUT HPTER In This hapter... Module Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Special V-memory Locations onfiguring the Module in Your ontrol Program Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter RT urnout etection its

236 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input 0 Module Specifications The F0-0RT -hannel Resistive Temperature etector Input Module provides the following features and benefits: Provides four RT input channels with 0. / F temperature resolution. utomatically converts type Pt00, jpt00, Pt000, 0 u, u, 0 Ni RT signals into direct temperature readings. No extra scaling or complex conversion is required. Temperature data can be expressed in F or, and as magnitude plus sign or s complement. Precision lead wire resistance compensation by dual matched current sources and ratiometric measurements. Works with three wire and four wire RTs. The temperature calculation and linearization are based on data provided by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). iagnostic features include detection of short circuits and input disconnection. PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX NOTE: The L0 PU s analog feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). See our website for more information: L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

237 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input Module alibration The module automatically re-calibrates every five seconds to remove any offset and gain errors. The F0-0RT module requires no user calibration. However, if your process requires calibration, it is possible to correct the RT tolerance using ladder logic. You can subtract or add a constant to the actual reading for that particular RT. The actual reading can also be scaled to obtain the desired value using ladder logic. Input Specifications The following table provide the specifications for the F0-0RT Input Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Input Specifications Number of hannels Input Ranges Pt00: to 0.0 (- F to F) PT000: to.0 (- F to 0 F) jpt00: -.0 to 0.0 (- F to F) 0 u: to 0.0 (- F to 00 F) u: to 0.0 (- F to 00 F) 0 Ni: -0.0 to 0.0 (- F to 00 F) Resolution bit ( in ) isplay Resolution ±0., ±0. F (±.) bsolute Maximum Ratings Fault Protected Inputs to ±0V onverter Type harge alancing, bit Sampling Rate 0ms per channel Linearity Error (End to End) ±0.0 maximum, ±0.0 typical PL Update Rate channels/scan Temperature rift ppm / maximum Maximum Inaccuracy ± RT Excitation urrent 00µ ommon Mode Range 0-V Notch Filter (ommon Mode Rejection) >0 db notches at 0/0Hz igital Input Points Required None; uses special V-memory locations based on slot Power udget Requirements 0 V (supplied by base) Operating Temperature 0 to 0 ( to 0 F) Storage Temperature -0 to 0 (- to F) Relative Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental ir No corrosive gases permitted Vibration MIL ST 0. Shock MIL ST 0. Noise Immunity NEM IS-0 Replacement Terminal lock 0-- Wire Size Range & onnector Screw Torque - WG; 0.Nm; N-SS Screwdriver Recommended 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

238 0 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. o not ground the shield at both the module and the source. Unused channels require shorting wires (jumpers) installed from terminals H+ to H to OM. o not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. heck local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PL and the field devices. Pull the terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module. You can remove the RT module from the PL by folding out the retaining tabs at the top and bottom of the module. s the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module s connector is lifted out of the PL socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module out of its slot. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0 0RT terminal block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring. RT - Resistance Temperature etector Use shielded RTs whenever possible to minimize noise on the input signal. Ground the shield wire at one end only, preferably at the RT source. Lead onfiguration for RT Sensors The suggested three-lead configuration shown below provides one lead to the H+ terminal, one lead to the H terminal, and one lead to the common terminal. ompensation circuitry nulls out the lead length for accurate temperature measurements. Some sensors have four leads. When making connections, do not connect the second lead to the H+ input; leave that lead unconnected. o not use configurations that lack the use of the same color lead to both the H and OM terminals. There is no compensation and temperature readings will be inaccurate. This module has low RT excitation current, worst-case dissipation with 00 RTs connected is only 0.0mW. Wiring onnections For Typical RT Sensor Sensor lack lack L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0 To H To OM Red To H+ Red No onnection (if applicable) (if sensor has leads, only connect one lead to H+)

239 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input mbient Variations in Temperature The F0-0RT module has been designed to operate within the ambient temperature range of 0 to 0. Precision analog measurement with no long term temperature drift is assured by a chopper stabilized programmable gain amplifier, ratiometric referencing, and automatic offset and gain calibration. Wiring iagram Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0-0RT terminal block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring. Note Note Note x H+ H- OM H+ H- OM H+ H- OM H+ H- OM OM NLOG MULTIPLEXER 00 urrent Source Ref. dj. 00 urrent Source + - / RT F0-0RT Notes:. The three wires connecting the RT to the module must be the same type and length. o not use the shield or drain wire for the third connection.. Unused channels require shorting wires (jumpers) installed from terminals H+ to H to OM to prevent possible noise from influencing active channels. This should be done even if the unused channel is not enabled in the V-memory configuration.. If a RT sensor has four wires, the plus sense wire should be left unconnected as shown. OM OM OM OM OM 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

240 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input 0 Module Operation hannel Scanning Sequence The L0 and L0 read all four input channels data during each scan. The PUs support special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail on the following page, Special V memory Locations. Scan Read Inputs Execute pplication Program Read the data Store data Write to Outputs Scan N Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ Scan N+ L0/L0 PL h,,, h,,, h,,, h,,, h,,, nalog Module Update Even though the channel updates to the PU are synchronous with the PU scan, the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts the signal to a -bit binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program. The time required to sense the temperature and copy the value to V-memory is 0 milliseconds minimum to 0 milliseconds plus scan time maximum (number of channels x 0 milliseconds + scan time). L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

241 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input Special V-memory Locations The L0 and L0 PLs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option slots. These V-memory locations allow you to: specify the number of input channels enabled and /inary data format specify the input pointer address specify the RT input type specify the units code temperature scale and data format specify burnout data value at burnout read module setup diagnostics Module onfiguration Registers The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the L0 and L0 PLs for the F0 0RT module. Module onfiguration Parameters : Number of hannels Enabled / ata Format L0 Slot L0 and L0 Option Slot L0 Slot L0 Slot L0 Slot L0 Slot V00 V00 V0 V0 V0 : Input Pointer V0 V0 V V V : RT Type V0 V0 V V V : Units ode V0 V0 V V V E: RT urnout ata Value V0 V0 V V V F: iagnostic Error V0 V0 V V V : Number of hannels Enabled/ata Format Register This V memory location is used to define the number of input channels to be enabled and to set the channel data to or binary format. Number of hannels Enabled hannel ata in Format hannel ata in inary Format hannel K00 K00 hannels K00 K00 hannels K00 K00 hannels K00 K00 ata Format MS Number of channels LS 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

242 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input 0 : Input Pointer Register This is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing module channel input data. The V memory location loaded in the input pointer V memory location is an octal number identifying the first V-memory location for the input data. This V memory location is user defined, but must use available consecutive V-memory locations. For example, loading O000 causes the pointer to write h s data value to V000/00, h s data value to V00/00, H s data value to V00/00 and h s data value to V00/00. Note: Each channel s data value occupies two () consecutive V-memory locations. This allows for more than four () digits to be displayed if a format for channel data is selected. For example:. F. binary format for either a -bit magnitude plus sign or -bit s complement value will occupy the first V-memory location of the two V-memory locations assigned for the slected channel. Refer to the specific PL s user manual being used for available user V-memory locations. : RT Type Selection Register This V memory register must be set to match the type of RT being used. Use the table to determine your settings. The module can be used with many types of RTs. ll channels of the module must be the same RT type. The default setting from the factory is Pt00. This selects the IN 0 European type RT. European curve type RTs are calibrated to IN 0, S0, or IE specifications which is.00 / / (00 =. ). The jpt00 type is used for the merican curve (.00 / / ), platinum 00 RTs. The 0 and RT settings are used with copper RTs. RT Type Pt00 (European curve w/tr =.00) u0 u jpt00 (merican curve w/tr =.00) Pt000 Ni0 MS Input Selection K0 K K K K K Input Type Selection LS L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

243 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input : Units ode Register ll RT types are converted into a direct temperature reading in either Fahrenheit or elsius. The data contains one implied decimal place. For example, a value in V-memory of 00 would be 00. or F. ll RT ranges can include negative temperatures, therefore the display resolution is from. to +.. Negative temperatures can be represented in either s complement or magnitude plus sign form. If the temperature is negative, the most significant bit in the V-memory location is set. The s complement data format may be required to correctly display bipolar data on some operator interfaces. This data format could also be used to simplify averaging a bipolar signal. To view this data format in irectsoft, select Signed ecimal. The bipolar input ranges may be converted to a -bit magnitude plus sign or a -bit s complement value. it 0 = Temperature Scale 0 = Temp in degrees F = Temp in degrees it = ata Format 0 = Magnitude plus sign bit format = s omplement format Unit ode Register - Truth Table Temperature Scale ata Format it it 0 Value F Magnitude + sign bit 0 0 K0 Magnitude + sign bit 0 K F s omplement 0 K s omplement K MS Temp scale LS ata Format 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

244 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input 0 E: RT urnout ata Value Register This register is used to define either up scale or down scale channel values when a channel RT burnout occurs. it 0 = Up scale/down scale value at urnout 0 = Up scale value at urnout, FFF H (/HEX) or (inary) written to H register = own scale value at urnout: 0000 H (/HEX) or 0 (inary) written to H register F: iagnostics Error Register This register is used to determine whether the configuration of the module is valid or not. it 0 = iagnostic bit: 0 = Module setup is valid = Module setup is not valid MS MS Up scale/down scale urnout value LS LS iagnostics bit 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

245 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input onfiguring the Module in Your ontrol Program L0 Example The example program below shows how to setup the F0 0RT for input channels enabled, use of a type Pt00 RT on all input channels, channel data format, ºF temperature scale, magnitude plus sign bit format, and with an up scale burnout value specified. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the temperature or voltage input data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations with the data, compare the data against preset values, etc. V000 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K000 V00 L O000 V0 L K0 V0 V0 V0 -or - L K00 Loads a constant that specifies the number of input channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0 =, = binary). The LSN selects the number of channels (,, or ). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. K00 enables channels in binary format. Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here using the L instruction would designate the following addresses: h V000/00, h V00/00, h V00/00, h V00/00. See note on page -. The octal address (O000) is stored here. Special V memory location V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. Loads a 0 into the accumulator to set the following parameters in (V0 V0). Special V memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies the RT Input Type. K0 selects a type Pt00 RT. See table on page - for selections. Special V memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies the Units ode (temperature scale and data format) selections. K0 selects a º F temperature scale and magnitude plus sign bit format. See truth table on page - for selections. Special V memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies the RT up scale/down scale burnout value. K0 selects an up scale burnout value of FFFh (/HEX) or, (inary). The value is written to the channel input register when a RT burnout occurs. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

246 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input 0 L0 Example The example program below shows how to setup the F0 0RT for input channels enabled, use of a type u0 RT on the first input channels, channel data format, º temperature scale, s complement format, and with a down scale burnout value specified. gain, place this rung in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. SP0 L K000 V00 L O000 V0 L K V0 L K V0 L K V0 -or - L K00 Loads a constant that specifies the number of input channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0 =, = binary). The LSN selects the number of channels (,, or ). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. K00 enables channels in binary format. Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here using the L instruction would designate the following addresses: h V000/00, h V00/00 See note on page -. The octal address (O000) is stored here. Special V memory location V0 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. Loads a constant that specifies the RT input type. K selects a type u0 RT. Enter a K0 K to specify the RT Input Type. See table on page - for selections. Special V memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies the RT input type. Loads a constant that specifies the Units ode (temperature scale and data format). K selects º and s complement data format. See truth table on page - for selections. Special V memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies the temperature scale and data format selections. Loads a constant that specifies the RT burnout data value at burnout. K specifies a down scale value of 0000h (/HEX) or 0 (inary) to be written to the channel input register when a RT burnout occurs. Special V memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies the RT up scale/down scale burnout value. The value is written to the channel input register when a RT burnout occurs. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

247 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input L0 Example The example program below shows how to setup the F0 0RT in option slot for input channels enabled, use of a type Pt00 RT on all input channels, channel data format, ºF temperature scale, magnitude plus sign bit format, and with an up scale burnout value specified. Use the table shown on page to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slots. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the temperature or voltage input data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations with the data, compare the data against preset values, etc. V000 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. SP0 L K000 V00 L O000 V0 L K0 V0 V0 V0 -or - L K00 Loads a constant that specifies the number of input channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0 =, = binary). The LSN selects the number of channels (,, or ). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. K00 enables channels in binary format. Special V-memory location assigned to option slot that specifies the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here using the L instruction would designate the following addresses: h V000/00, h V00/00, h V00/00, h V00/00. See note on page -. The octal address (O000) is stored here. Special V memory location V0 is assigned to option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. Loads a 0 into the accumulator to set the following parameters in (V0 V0). Special V memory location assigned to option slot that specifies the RT Input Type. K0 selects a type Pt00 RT. See table on page - for selections. Special V memory location assigned to option slot that specifies the Units ode (temperature scale and data format) selections. K0 selects a º F temperature scale and magnitude plus sign bit format. See truth table on page - for selections. Special V memory location assigned to option slot that specifies the RT up scale/down scale burnout value. K0 selects an up scale burnout value of FFFh (/HEX) or, (inary). The value is written to the channel input register when a RT burnout occurs. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

248 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input 0 L0 Example The example program below shows how to setup the F0 0RT in option slot for input channels enabled, use of a type u0 RT on the first input channels, channel data format, º temperature scale, s complement format, and with a down scale burnout value specified. Use the table shown on page to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slots. V-memory location V000 is shown in the example, but you can use any available user V-memory location. gain, place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. SP0 L K000 V0 L O000 V L K V L K V L K V -or - L K00 Loads a constant that specifies the number of input channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0 =, = binary). The LSN selects the number of channels (,, or ). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interface units. K00 enables channels in binary format. Special V-memory location assigned to option slot that specifies the data format and the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O000 entered here using the L instruction would designate the following addresses: h V000/00, h V00/00 See note on page -. The octal address (O000) is stored here. Special V memory location V is assigned to option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the PU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. Loads a constant that specifies the RT input type. K selects a type u0 RT. Enter a K0 K to specify the RT Input Type. See table on page - for selections. Special V memory location assigned to option slot that specifies the RT input type. Loads a constant that specifies the Units ode (temperature scale and data format). K selects º and s complement data format. See truth table on page - for selections. Special V memory location assigned to option slot that specifies the temperature scale and data format selections. Loads a constant that specifies the RT burnout data value at burnout. K specifies a down scale value of 0000h (/HEX) or 0 (inary) to be written to the channel input register when a RT burnout occurs. Special V memory location assigned to option slot that specifies the RT up scale/down scale burnout value. The value is written to the channel input register when a RT burnout occurs. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

249 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic to determine whether the value being returned represents a positive temperature or a negative temperature. There is a simple solution: If you are using bipolar ranges and you get a value greater than or equal to 000 H, the value is negative. If you get a value less than or equal to FFF H, the value is positive. The sign bit is the most significant bit, which combines 000 H to the data value. If the value is greater than or equal to 000 H, you only have to mask the most significant bit and the active channel bits to determine the actual data value. The following two programs show how you can accomplish this. The first example uses magnitude plus sign (binary) and the second example uses magnitude plus sign (). Since you always want to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be placed before any other operations that use the data, such as math instructions, scaling operations, and so forth. lso, if you are using stage programming instructions, these rungs should be in a stage that is always active. Note: you only need this logic for each channel that is using bipolar input signals. The examples only show two channels. Magnitude Plus Sign (inary) heck hannel SP V000 heck hannel SP V00 K000 K000 L V000 N KFFF V00 L V00 N KFFF V0 Load channel data from V-memory into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. This instruction masks the sign bit of the binary data, if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V00. Now you can use the data normally. hannel data is negative when is on (a value of.0 reads as 00,.0 is 00, etc.). Load channel from V-memory into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. This instruction masks the sign bit of the binary data, if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V0. Now you can use the data normally. hannel data is negative when is on (a value of.0 reads as 00,.0 is 00, etc.). 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

250 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input 0 Magnitude Plus Sign () heck hannel SP V00 heck hannel SP V00 K000 K000 L V000 N KFFFFFFF V00 L V00 N KFFFFFFF V0 Load channel data from V-memory into the accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative. ontact SP is always on. This instruction masks the sign bit of the data, if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V00. Now you can use the data normally. hannel data is negative when is on (a value of.0 reads as ,.0 is , etc.). Load channel from V-memory into the accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative. ontact SP is always on. This instruction masks the sign bit of the data, if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V0. Now you can use the data normally. hannel data is negative when is on (a value of.0 reads as ,.0 is , etc.). L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

251 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input Negative Temperatures s omplement (inary/pointer Method) You can use the s complement mode for negative temperature display purposes, while at the same time using the magnitude plus sign of the temperature in your control program. The irectsoft element Signed ecimal is used to display negative numbers in s complement form. To find the absolute value of a negative number in s complement, invert the number and add as shown in the following example: V000 K000 L V000 INV K V00 Load negative value into the accumulator so we can convert it to a positive value. Invert the binary pattern in the accumulator. dd. Save hannel data at V00. Repeat for other channels as required. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

252 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input 0 nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter PI Loops / Filtering: Please refer to the PI Loop Operation chapter in the L0 or L0 User Manual for information on the built-in PV filter (L0/0) and the ladder logic filter (L0 only) shown below. filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PI loops to prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics. Smoothing the Input Signal (L0 only): The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help stabilize PI loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator interface display, etc. Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters to smooth the analog input signal. Using inary ata Format SP L V000 TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V0 Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format and has been loaded from V-memory location V000, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increases filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering). dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Loads the binary number filtered value from the accumulator into location V0 to use in your application or PI loop. L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

253 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input NOTE: e careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method in format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (IN) as shown below. If you are using the pointer method in inary format, the conversion to binary (IN) instruction is not needed. Using ata Format SP L V000 IN TOR SUR V00 MULR R0. R V00 V00 RTO V0 Loads the analog signal, which is in format and has been loaded from V-memory location V000, into the accumulator. ontact SP is always on. onverts a value in the accumulator to binary. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number. Subtracts the real number stored in location V00 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V00 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0. (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter range is 0. to 0.. Smaller filter factors increases filtering. (.0 eliminates filtering). dds the real number stored in location V00 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. opies the value in the accumulator to location V00. onverts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. onverts the binary value in the accumulator to a number. Note: The instruction is not needed for PI loop PV (loop PV is a binary number). Loads the number filtered value from the accumulator into location V0 to use in your application or PI loop. 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

254 hapter : F0-0RT -hannel RT Input 0 RT urnout etection its Special Relays orresponding to RT urnouts The following Special Relay (SP) bits can be used in your program to monitor for RT burnout. SP bit : 0 = RT OK = RT burnout Module hannel L0 Slot L0 and L0 Option Slot L0 Slot L0 Slot L0 Slot L0 Slot hannel SP00 SP0 SP0 SP0 SP0 hannel SP0 SP SP SP SP hannel SP0 SP SP SP SP hannel SP0 SP SP SP SP 0 L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

255 F0-0THM -HNNEL THERMOOUPLE INPUT HPTER In This hapter... Module Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Special V-memory Locations onfiguring the Module in Your ontrol Program Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign Module Resolution nalog Input Ladder Logic Filter Thermocouple urnout etection its

256 hapter : F0-0THM -hannel Thermocouple Input 0 Module Specifications The F0-0THM -hannel Thermocouple Input Module provides the following features and benefits: Four thermocouple input channels with -bit voltage resolution or 0. / F temperature resolution. utomatically converts type E, J, K, R, S, T,, N, or thermocouple signals into direct temperature readings. No extra scaling or complex conversion is required. Temperature data can be expressed in F or. Module can be configured as 0.0mV, ±.0mV, ±.mv, 0.mV, ±.mv and 0.V input and will convert volts and millivolt signal levels into -bit digital (0 ) values. Signal processing features include automatic cold junction compensation (J), thermocouple linearization, and digital filtering. The temperature calculation and linearization are based on data provided by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). iagnostic features include detection of thermocouple burnout or disconnection. PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX NOTE: The L0 PU s analog feature for this module requires irectsoft Version.0c (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). The L0 requires irectsoft version V.0, build (or later) and firmware version.0 (or later). See our website for more information: L0/0 Option Modules User Manual; th Ed., /0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual Volume 1 of 2. Manual Number: D0-USER-M

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual Volume 1 of 2. Manual Number: D0-USER-M L Micro PL User Manual Volume of Manual Number: -USER-M Notes WRNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from utomationdirect.com, doing business as utomationirect. We want your new automation

More information

EZ-ETHERNET / EZ-ETHERPLUS Card Installation and User Manual

EZ-ETHERNET / EZ-ETHERPLUS Card Installation and User Manual EZ-ETHERNET / EZ-ETHERPLUS Card Installation and User Manual WARNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone

More information

CTRIO High-Speed Counter Module. Manual Number: HX-CTRIO-M

CTRIO High-Speed Counter Module. Manual Number: HX-CTRIO-M CTRIO High-Speed Counter Module Manual Number: HX-CTRIO-M WARNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone

More information

KEPDirect for PLCs Server Installation and Setup Quick Start Manual DA-KEPPLC-M

KEPDirect for PLCs Server Installation and Setup Quick Start Manual DA-KEPPLC-M Server Installation and Setup Quick Start Manual DA-KEPPLC-M WARNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com, doing business as, AutomationDirect. We want your new automation

More information

OPC Server v5.x Installation and Setup Quick Start Manual PC-KEP-M

OPC Server v5.x Installation and Setup Quick Start Manual PC-KEP-M OPC Server v5.x Installation and Setup Quick Start Manual PC-KEP-M WARNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com doing business as, AUTOMATIONDIRECT. We want your new

More information

Programming Software User Manual PC-DSOFT5-M

Programming Software User Manual PC-DSOFT5-M Programming Software User Manual P-SOFT-M WRNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from utomationdirect.com. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. nyone who installs or uses

More information

Ethernet Base Controller User Manual. Manual Number H24 EBC M

Ethernet Base Controller User Manual. Manual Number H24 EBC M Ethernet Base Controller User Manual Manual Number H24 EBC M WARNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com, doing business as AutomationDirect. We want your new DirectLOGIC

More information

DL06 Micro PLC User Manual Volume 2 of 2. Manual Number: D0-06USER-M

DL06 Micro PLC User Manual Volume 2 of 2. Manual Number: D0-06USER-M L0 Micro PL User Manual Volume of Manual Number: 0-0USER-M WRNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from utomationdirect.com, doing business as, utomationirect. We want your new automation

More information

T1K DEVNETS DeviceNet Base Controller User Manual. Manual Number T1K DEVNETS M

T1K DEVNETS DeviceNet Base Controller User Manual. Manual Number T1K DEVNETS M T1K DEVNETS DeviceNet Base Controller User Manual Manual Number T1K DEVNETS M WARNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com. We want your new DirectLOGIC automation equipment

More information

D0 DCM Data Communications Module. Manual Number D0 DCM M

D0 DCM Data Communications Module. Manual Number D0 DCM M D0 DCM Data Communications Module Manual Number D0 DCM M WARNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com, doing business as, AutomationDirect. We want your new DirectLOGIC

More information

DL05 IBox Instructions PLC User Manual Supplement. Manual Number: DL05-IBOX-S

DL05 IBox Instructions PLC User Manual Supplement. Manual Number: DL05-IBOX-S L05 Iox Instructions PL User Manual upplement Manual Number: L05-IOX- WRNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from utomationdirect.com, doing business as utomationirect. We want your new automation

More information

D0 DEVNETS DeviceNet Slave Module User Manual. Manual Number D0 DEVNETS M

D0 DEVNETS DeviceNet Slave Module User Manual. Manual Number D0 DEVNETS M D0 DEVNETS DeviceNet Slave Module User Manual Manual Number D0 DEVNETS M WARNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com. We want your new DirectLOGIC automation equipment

More information

GS Series AC Drive Ethernet Interface User Manual

GS Series AC Drive Ethernet Interface User Manual GS Series AC Drive Ethernet Interface User Manual BLANK PAGE ~ WARNING ~ Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com, doing business as AutomationDirect. We want your new automation

More information

DL06 User Manual. Manual Number: D0-06USER-M. Volume 2 of 2

DL06 User Manual. Manual Number: D0-06USER-M. Volume 2 of 2 DL06 User Manual Manual Number: D0-06USER-M Volume 2 of 2 WARNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone

More information

Chapter. Getting Started. In This Chapter...

Chapter. Getting Started. In This Chapter... Getting Started hapter In This hapter... bout This Manual... onventions Used... Introduction... Protos X I/O System omponents... Protos X I/O System Example... hapter : Getting Started 0 bout This Manual

More information

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual Volume 2 of 2. Manual Number: D0-USER-M

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual Volume 2 of 2. Manual Number: D0-USER-M L0 Micro PL User Manual Volume of Manual Number: 0-USER-M Notes WRNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from utomationdirect.com, doing business as utomationirect. We want your new automation

More information

Chapter. System design and. configuration. In This Chapter

Chapter. System design and. configuration. In This Chapter hapter System design and configuration In This hapter L0 System esign Strategies... Module Placement... Power udgeting... onfiguring the L0 s omm Ports... onnecting to MOUS and irectnet Networks... Non

More information

Stellar SR55 Soft Starter User Manual. SR55_UMW First Edition, Revision C

Stellar SR55 Soft Starter User Manual. SR55_UMW First Edition, Revision C Stellar SR55 Soft Starter User Manual SR55_UMW First Edition, Revision C BLANK PAGE Stellar SR55 Series Soft Starter User Manual 1st Ed, Rev C 06/22/2018 Warnings and Trademarks ~ WARNING ~ Thank you for

More information

Chapter. Getting Started. In this Chapter

Chapter. Getting Started. In this Chapter Getting Started hapter In this hapter Introduction... onventions Used... L0 Micro PL omponents... 4 Programming Methods... 4 I/O Selection Quick hart... Quick Start for PL heckout and Programming... Steps

More information

Chapter. F0-04AD-2, 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input. In This Chapter...

Chapter. F0-04AD-2, 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input. In This Chapter... F0-0-, -hannel nalog Voltage Input hapter In This hapter... Module Specifications... Setting the Module Jumpers... onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring... Wiring iagram... Module Operation... Special

More information

Chapter. Specifications - Terminal Bases and Power Supplies. In This Chapter:

Chapter. Specifications - Terminal Bases and Power Supplies. In This Chapter: Specifications - hapter Terminal ases and Power Supplies In This hapter: TK-0(-) I/O Terminal ase... TK-(-) I/O Terminal ase... TK-0, TK-0 Power Supply... alculating the Power udget... Managing the Power

More information

This Errata Sheet contains corrections or changes made after the publication of this manual.

This Errata Sheet contains corrections or changes made after the publication of this manual. Errata Sheet This Errata Sheet contains corrections or changes made after the publication of this manual. Product Family: D35 Manual Number D3-USER-M Revision and Date 1st Edition, Rev. D; January 1 Date:

More information

Index A B C D. i-1

Index A B C D. i-1 ccumulating Fast Timer instruction, ccumulating Timer (TMR) instruction, ccumulator, ccumulator Instructions, liases, nalog Ioxes, 0 pprovals, SII onversion Table, G- SII In/Out and PRINT, SII Instructions,

More information

Chapter. F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog. Current Output. In This Chapter...

Chapter. F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog. Current Output. In This Chapter... F-0-, F-0-L -hannel nalog hapter urrent In This hapter... Module Specifications onnecting and isconnecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Writing the ontrol Program 0 Module Specifications - The F-0-

More information

Software User Manual Volume 1 of 2 P3-PSOFT-M

Software User Manual Volume 1 of 2 P3-PSOFT-M Software User Manual Volume of P-PSOFT-M Notes WRNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from utomationdirect.com, doing business as, utomationirect. We want your new automation equipment to

More information

HO PSCM Profibus Slave Communications Module User Manual

HO PSCM Profibus Slave Communications Module User Manual HO PSCM Profibus Slave Communications Module User Manual Manual Number HX PSCM M WARNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com, doing business as AutomationDirect. We

More information

HO PSCM Profibus Slave Communications Module User Manual

HO PSCM Profibus Slave Communications Module User Manual HO PSCM Profibus Slave Communications Module User Manual Manual Number HX PSCM M WARNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com, doing business as AutomationDirect. We

More information

FX Supervisory Controller Wireless TEC Option Card Installation Instructions

FX Supervisory Controller Wireless TEC Option Card Installation Instructions Installation Instructions Wireless TEC Option Card Date August 29, 2014 FX Supervisory Controller Wireless TEC Option Card Installation Instructions Applications IMPORTANT: The FX Supervisory Controller

More information

Ethernet Remote Master Module Manual. Manual Number: H24-ERM-M

Ethernet Remote Master Module Manual. Manual Number: H24-ERM-M Ethernet Remote Master Module Manual Manual Number: H-ERM-M WRNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from utomationdirect.com, doing business as, utomationirect. We want your new automation

More information

ControlLogix Redundant Power Supply Chassis Adapter Module

ControlLogix Redundant Power Supply Chassis Adapter Module Installation Instructions ControlLogix Redundant Power Supply Chassis Adapter Module Catalog Number 1756-PSCA Use this publication as a guide when installing the ControlLogix 1756-PSCA chassis adapter

More information

Chapter. In this Chapter... Safety Guidelines Introduction Panel Cutout Dimensions (all models) Wiring Guidelines...

Chapter. In this Chapter... Safety Guidelines Introduction Panel Cutout Dimensions (all models) Wiring Guidelines... Installation & Wiring hapter In this hapter... Safety Guidelines... - Introduction... - Panel utout imensions (all models)... - Wiring Guidelines... - hapter : Installation and Wiring 0 Safety Guidelines

More information

Chapter. System Design and Configuration. In This Chapter:

Chapter. System Design and Configuration. In This Chapter: System esign and onfiguration hapter In This hapter: L0 System esign Strategies... Module Placement... alculating the Power udget... Local Expansion I/O... Expanding L0 I/O... Network onnections to Modbus

More information

Sun Control Station. Performance Module. Sun Microsystems, Inc. Part No September 2003, Revision A

Sun Control Station. Performance Module. Sun Microsystems, Inc.   Part No September 2003, Revision A Sun Control Station Performance Module Sun Microsystems, Inc. www.sun.com Part No. 817-3610-10 September 2003, Revision A Submit comments about this document at: http://www.sun.com/hwdocs/feedback Copyright

More information

Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance Cabling Guide. For ZS3-x, 7x20 Controllers, and DE2-24, Sun Disk Shelves

Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance Cabling Guide. For ZS3-x, 7x20 Controllers, and DE2-24, Sun Disk Shelves Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance Cabling Guide For ZS3-x, 7x20 Controllers, and DE2-24, Sun Disk Shelves Part No: E53670-01 June 2014 Copyright 2009, 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

More information

FlexArmor 24V dc Sinking Input Modules

FlexArmor 24V dc Sinking Input Modules Installation Instructions FlexArmor 24V dc Sinking Input Modules Catalog Number 1798-IB4 & 1798-IB8 42638 The FlexArmor I/O modules (Cat. No. 1798-IB4 & 1798-IB8) mount in a FlexArmor Baseplate. Use compatible

More information

PLC CommuniCations In This Chapter...

PLC CommuniCations In This Chapter... PL ommunications In This hapter... Introduction... PL ommunication Ports Specifications... LE Status Indicators... Steps to Using the LIK PL ommunications... Typical ommunications pplications... W-: om

More information

GETTING STARTED WITH IN-WALL RELAY SWITCH

GETTING STARTED WITH IN-WALL RELAY SWITCH GETTING STARTED WITH IN-WALL RELAY SWITCH This document is the property of Webee L.L.C. The data contained here, in whole or in part, may not be duplicated, used or disclosed outside the recipient for

More information

Chapter. Getting Started. In this Chapter...

Chapter. Getting Started. In this Chapter... Getting Started hapter In this hapter... Introduction...-2 onventions Used...- What s in the ox?...- Getting Started...- efore You egin......- Step - Install onfiguration Software...- Step 2 - Launch onfiguration

More information

AgileMesh Node Configuration Guide

AgileMesh Node Configuration Guide AgileMesh Node Configuration Guide AV1520G2 AV2010G2 Node Software Version 2.X September 7, 2012 Document Rev 1.7 Table of Contents Table of Contents...2 FCC Statement...3 Industry Canada Statement...4

More information

Dolphin CT50 Non-Incendive

Dolphin CT50 Non-Incendive Dolphin CT50 Non-Incendive powered by Android 6.0 Quick Start Guide CT50NI-AN6-EN-QS Rev B 6/18 Introduction This document is for the Dolphin CT50 NI. This is the nonincendive version of the Dolphin CT50.

More information

CHAPTER INSTALLATION AND NETWORK LAYOUTS. In This Chapter:

CHAPTER INSTALLATION AND NETWORK LAYOUTS. In This Chapter: INSTLLTION N NETWORK LYOUTS HPTER In This hapter: Inserting the ERM Module in the I/O ase............................... L0/o-more Slot hoices......................................... H ERM (00, F) Module

More information

Chapter. Operation. In This Chapter

Chapter. Operation. In This Chapter PU Specifications and Operation In This hapter hapter PU Overview....- PU Specifications....- Using attery ackup.... -0 PU Setup Information.... - PU Operation.... - I/O Response Time.... - PU Scan Time

More information

Chapter. Getting Started. In this Chapter...

Chapter. Getting Started. In this Chapter... Getting Started hapter In this hapter... Introduction...- The Purpose of this Manual...- Supplemental Manuals...- Technical Support...- onventions Used...- Key Topics for Each hapter...- gency pprovals...-

More information

Oracle Dual Port QDR InfiniBand Adapter M3. Product Notes

Oracle Dual Port QDR InfiniBand Adapter M3. Product Notes Oracle Dual Port QDR InfiniBand Adapter M3 Product Notes Part No.: E40986-01 September 2013 Copyright 2013 Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This software and related documentation are

More information

Sun Management Center 3.6 Version 7 Add-On Software Release Notes

Sun Management Center 3.6 Version 7 Add-On Software Release Notes Sun Management Center 3.6 Version 7 Add-On Software Release Notes For Sun Fire, Sun Blade, Netra, and Sun Ultra Systems Sun Microsystems, Inc. www.sun.com Part No. 820-2406-10 October 2007, Revision A

More information

Solaris 9 9/04 Installation Roadmap

Solaris 9 9/04 Installation Roadmap Solaris 9 9/04 Installation Roadmap This document is a guide to the DVD-ROM, CD-ROMs, and documents involved in installing the Solaris 9 9/04 software. Unless otherwise specified, this document refers

More information

USER GUIDE. PoE & optical transmission Gigabit Ethernet PoE Switch (GGM GS07P)

USER GUIDE. PoE & optical transmission Gigabit Ethernet PoE Switch (GGM GS07P) USER GUIDE PoE & optical transmission Gigabit Ethernet PoE Switch (GGM GS07P) UK Statement Copyright @ 2002-2016 our company. All Rights Reserved. This document contains proprietary information that is

More information

Sun Ethernet Fabric Operating System. LLA Administration Guide

Sun Ethernet Fabric Operating System. LLA Administration Guide Sun Ethernet Fabric Operating System LLA Administration Guide Part No.: E41876-01 July 2013 Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This software and related documentation are

More information

POINT I/O 2 Voltage Input Analog Module

POINT I/O 2 Voltage Input Analog Module 0 1 Installation Instructions POINT I/O 2 Voltage Input nalog Module (at. No. 1734-IE2V Series B) Module Status Network Status NODE: nalog Voltage Input 9 4 5 3 2 6 8 7 10 1 Description Description 1 1

More information

SSI 021 S-DIAS Safety SSI Absolute Value Encoder

SSI 021 S-DIAS Safety SSI Absolute Value Encoder SSI 021 S-DIAS Safety SSI Absolute Value Encoder Date of creation: 25.02.2014 Version date: 18.10.2017 Article number: 20-894-021-E Publisher: SIGMATEK GmbH & Co KG A-5112 Lamprechtshausen Tel.: +43/6274/4321

More information

Chapter. Setup & Manage 2 3 D A B C D. In This Chapter

Chapter. Setup & Manage 2 3 D A B C D. In This Chapter Setup & Manage ommunication Links In This hapter hapter Establish the ommunications Link.... - Setup a Serial Link.... - Setup an Ethernet Link... - Setup a Modem Link.... - omm Link Options.... - Going

More information

1769 Compact I/O Communication Bus Expansion Cables

1769 Compact I/O Communication Bus Expansion Cables 1769 Compact I/O Communication Bus Expansion Cables (Cat. No. 1769-CRR1, 1769-CRR3, 1769-CLL1, 1769-CLL3, 1769-CRL1, 1769-CRL3) Installation Inside... For More Information... 2 Hazardous Location Considerations...

More information

P2-HSO High-Speed Isolated Sinking/Sourcing Output. Connector Specifications

P2-HSO High-Speed Isolated Sinking/Sourcing Output. Connector Specifications WARNG: To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from

More information

P3-08RTD Analog Input

P3-08RTD Analog Input General Specifications Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F), Storage Temperature -20 to 70 C (-4 to 158 F) Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing) Environmental Air No corrosive gases permitted Vibration

More information

ArmorBlock MaXum Robot I/O Cable Base and Kempf Box Plate

ArmorBlock MaXum Robot I/O Cable Base and Kempf Box Plate Installation Instructions ArmorBlock MaXum Robot I/O Cable Base and Kempf Box Plate (Cat. No. 1792D-CB23 and -KPLT) CB23 KPLT 43338 43333 The 23mm ArmorBlock MaXum Robot Ι/Ο Cable Base mates with 4 or

More information

Chapter. Operation. In this Chapter

Chapter. Operation. In this Chapter hapter PU Specifications and Operation In this hapter Introduction... PU Specifications... PU Hardware Setup... PU Operation... I/O Response Time... PU Scan Time onsiderations... Memory Map... L0 System

More information

LVB-2 INSTRUCTION SHEET. Leakage Current Verification Box

LVB-2 INSTRUCTION SHEET. Leakage Current Verification Box LVB-2 INSTRUCTION SHEET Leakage Current Verification Box V 1.02 1.2018 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Manufacturer: Address: Product Name: Model Number: Associated Research, Inc. 13860 W. Laurel Dr. Lake Forest,

More information

User guide. Bluetooth Keyboard BKB10

User guide. Bluetooth Keyboard BKB10 User guide Bluetooth Keyboard BKB10 Contents Basics...3 Overview... 3 Charging the keyboard... 4 Turning on the keyboard... 5 Getting started... 6 Setting up the keyboard... 6 Support on the web...6 Legal

More information

FLEX Integra 4 Input Module

FLEX Integra 4 Input Module Installation Instructions FLEX Integra 4 Input Module (Cat. No. 1793-IB4 and -IB4S) 41355 Module Installation This module mounts on a DIN rail. It connects to an adapter or another FLEX I/O or Integra

More information

Chapter. In This Chapter:

Chapter. In This Chapter: hapter Installation, Wiring and Specifications In This hapter: Safety Guidelines... Mounting Guidelines... Installing ases... Installing omponents in the ase... ase Wiring Guidelines... I/O Wiring Strategies...

More information

Sun Rack Cabinet Extension Installation Guide

Sun Rack Cabinet Extension Installation Guide Sun Rack Cabinet Extension Installation Guide For Sun Rack 900-38, 1000-38, and 1000-42 Sun Microsystems, Inc. www.sun.com Part No. 819-3235-10 November 2006, Revision A Submit comments about this document

More information

FLEX I/O EtherNet/IP Adapter Module

FLEX I/O EtherNet/IP Adapter Module Installation Instructions FLEX I/O EtherNet/IP Adapter Module Catalog Numbers 1794-AENT Use this manual as a guide to install the FLEX I/O EtherNet/IP Adapter Module. Note that this manual covers hardware

More information

Appendix. Auxiliary Functions. In This Appendix...

Appendix. Auxiliary Functions. In This Appendix... uxiliary Functions ppendix In This ppendix... Introduction... UX * RLL Operations... UX * V-memory Operations... UX * I/O onfiguration... UX * PU onfiguration... UX * Handheld Programmer onfiguration...

More information

Cable Management Guide

Cable Management Guide Cable Management Guide Sun Fire High End Server Systems Sun Microsystems, Inc. www.sun.com Part No. 817-1753-11 July 2005, Revision A Submit comments about this document at: http://www.sun.com/hwdocs/feedback

More information

Installation and Setup. In This Chapter... Installing the H0 PSCM The Profibus Network Configuring the Module

Installation and Setup. In This Chapter... Installing the H0 PSCM The Profibus Network Configuring the Module Installation and Setup 1 2 In This Chapter.... Installing the H0 PSCM The Profibus Network Configuring the Module 2 2 Installing the H0 PSCM Remove the Slot Cover The first step in installing the option

More information

Sun Java System Directory Server Release Notes for HP-UX

Sun Java System Directory Server Release Notes for HP-UX Sun Java System Directory Server Release Notes for HP-UX Version 5.2 2005Q1 Part Number 819-1566-10 These Release Notes contain important information available at the time of release of Sun Java System

More information

Do Not Copy. Important User Information For More Information... 3

Do Not Copy. Important User Information For More Information... 3 Installation Instructions DH/RS-C Interface Module (Catalog Number 1-KE) Inside page Important User Information... For More Information... Hazardous Location Considerations... Environnements dangereux...

More information

SunVTS Quick Reference Card

SunVTS Quick Reference Card SunVTS Quick Reference Card Sun Microsystems, Inc. 901 San Antonio Road Palo Alto, CA 94303-4900 U.S.A. 650-960-1300 Part No. 806-6519-10 January 2001, Revision A Send comments about this document to:

More information

FLEX Integra 2 Input/2 Protected Output Module

FLEX Integra 2 Input/2 Protected Output Module Installation Instructions FLEX Integra 2 Input/2 Protected Output Module (Cat. No. 1793-IB2XOB2P and -IB2XOB2PS) 41355 Module Installation This module mounts on a DIN rail. It connects to an adapter or

More information

Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI Array Best Practices Manual

Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI Array Best Practices Manual Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI Array Best Practices Manual Architectures and Tips for Optimum Usage Sun Microsystems, Inc. 4150 Network Circle Santa Clara, CA 95054 U.S.A. 650-960-1300 Part No. 816-7293-11 October

More information

MB-GATEWAY. Hardware User Manual. Manual Number: MB-GATEWAY-USER-M

MB-GATEWAY. Hardware User Manual. Manual Number: MB-GATEWAY-USER-M M-GTEWY Hardware User Manual Manual Number: M-GTEWY-USER-M ~ WRNING ~ Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from utomationdirect.com, doing business as, utomationirect. We want your new automation

More information

SGW Series. Modbus Gateway USER MANUAL. Manual Number: SGW-USER-M

SGW Series. Modbus Gateway USER MANUAL. Manual Number: SGW-USER-M SGW Series Modbus Gateway USER MANUAL Manual Number: SGW-USER-M ~ WARNING ~ Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com, doing business as AutomationDirect. We want your new

More information

Sun Management Center 4.0 Version 4 Add-On Software Release Notes

Sun Management Center 4.0 Version 4 Add-On Software Release Notes Sun Management Center 4.0 Version 4 Add-On Software Release Notes Sun Microsystems, Inc. www.sun.com Part No. 820-4781-10 June 2008, Revision A Submit comments about this document at: http://www.sun.com/hwdocs/feedback

More information

This document is a preview generated by EVS

This document is a preview generated by EVS INTERNATIONAL STANDARD NORME INTERNATIONALE IEC 60848 Edition 3.0 2013-02 GRAFCET specification language for sequential function charts Langage de spécification GRAFCET pour diagrammes fonctionnels en

More information

Chapter. Maintenance and. Troubleshooting. In This Chapter...

Chapter. Maintenance and. Troubleshooting. In This Chapter... hapter Maintenance and Troubleshooting In This hapter... Hardware Maintenance... iagnostics... PU Indicators... PWR Indicator... RUN Indicator... PU Indicator... ommunications Problems... I/O Module Troubleshooting...

More information

Appendix. Auxiliary Functions. In This Appendix...

Appendix. Auxiliary Functions. In This Appendix... uxiliary Functions ppendix In This ppendix... Introduction... UX * RLL Operations... UX * V-memory Operations... UX * I/O onfiguration... UX * PU onfiguration... UX * Handheld Programmer onfiguration...

More information

Sun Management Center 4.0 Version 3 Add-On Software Release Notes

Sun Management Center 4.0 Version 3 Add-On Software Release Notes Sun Management Center 4.0 Version 3 Add-On Software Release Notes Sun Microsystems, Inc. www.sun.com Part No. 820-4491-10 March 2008, Revision A Submit comments about this document at: http://www.sun.com/hwdocs/feedback

More information

CHAPTER CONFIGURING THE ERM AND SLAVE MODULES WITH ERM WORKBENCH. In This Chapter:

CHAPTER CONFIGURING THE ERM AND SLAVE MODULES WITH ERM WORKBENCH. In This Chapter: ONFIGURING THE ERM N SLVE MOULES WITH ERM WORKENH HPTER In This hapter: ERM Workbench Software............................................ Launching ERM Workbench...........................................

More information

Remote I/O Scanner. Installation Instructions. (Catalog Number 1747-SN)

Remote I/O Scanner. Installation Instructions. (Catalog Number 1747-SN) Installation Instructions Remote I/O Scanner (Catalog Number 1747-SN) Inside...page Hazardous Location Considerations... 2 Environnements dangereux... 2 Overview... 3 Hardware Features... 4 Required Tools

More information

P3-RS Remote Slave. Remote Slave Specifications. The P3-RS is a full-featured, highperformance,

P3-RS Remote Slave. Remote Slave Specifications. The P3-RS is a full-featured, highperformance, Remote Slave Specifications Mounting Location Controller slot in remote base Display LCD, x0 characters, backlit, LCD characters are 5x7 with a dot pitch of 0.5mm; 2.25mm x 3.5mm Communications - USB IN:

More information

Removable Terminal Block Specifications

Removable Terminal Block Specifications To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to

More information

General Specifications. P2-SCM Serial Communications

General Specifications. P2-SCM Serial Communications General Specifications Module Type Intelligent Modules per Base I/O Points Used Field Wiring Connector Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Humidity Environmental Air Vibration Shock Field to Logic

More information

Chapter. Specifications: In This Chapter...

Chapter. Specifications: In This Chapter... Specifications: hapter PU Modules In This hapter... PU Specifications... PU General Specifications... ommunications Ports Specifications... Port Specifications (US)... Port Specifications (Serial)... US

More information

Example 1: Using Modbus Poll to MB-GATEWAY with DL06 Slave... A-2. Step 3: Connect to the MB-GATEWAY using the Modbus Poll simulator software...

Example 1: Using Modbus Poll to MB-GATEWAY with DL06 Slave... A-2. Step 3: Connect to the MB-GATEWAY using the Modbus Poll simulator software... pplication Examples ppendix In this ppendix... Example 1: Using Modbus Poll to M-GTEWY with L0 Slave... - Items needed for this example:... - Step 1: onnect the M-GTEWY serial port to the L0 secondary

More information

Table of Contents. Chapter 1: Getting Started. Chapter 2: Specifications

Table of Contents. Chapter 1: Getting Started. Chapter 2: Specifications Chapter 1: Getting Started Introduction...1 2 The Purpose of this Manual...1 2 About Getting Started...1 2 Supplemental Manuals and Other Help...1 2 Technical Support...1 2 Conventions Used...1 3 Key Topics

More information

INSTALLATION GUIDE 4- IN- ONE EMV L1 & L2 PIN PAD XPED- 8006L2-3CR, POE/USB/RS232

INSTALLATION GUIDE 4- IN- ONE EMV L1 & L2 PIN PAD XPED- 8006L2-3CR, POE/USB/RS232 INSTALLATION GUIDE 4- IN- ONE EMV L1 & L2 PIN PAD XPED- 8006L2-3CR, POE/USB/RS232 1. POWER ON THE 8006 PIN PAD There are three model of communication interface for xped- 8006L2-3CR: USB interface cable,

More information

Guide d'installation rapide TU2-EX

Guide d'installation rapide TU2-EX Guide d'installation rapide TU2-EX12 1.01 Table of Contents Français 1 1. Avant de commencer 1 2. Installation du matériel 2 Technical Specifications 3 Troubleshooting 4 Version 02.14.2011 1. Avant de

More information

Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance Simulator Quick Start Guide

Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance Simulator Quick Start Guide Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance Simulator Quick Start Guide March 2015 Part No: E39468-05 This document is a guide to Oracle ZFS Storage Appliance Simulator setup and initial configuration. The Simulator

More information

EcoView 8 DO Module Installation and Commissioning

EcoView 8 DO Module Installation and Commissioning Document No. 129-565 EcoView 8 DO Module Installation and Commissioning This document covers the installation and commissioning of the EcoView 8 DO Module. See the following documents for installation

More information

Sun Ethernet Fabric Operating System. IGMP Administration Guide

Sun Ethernet Fabric Operating System. IGMP Administration Guide Sun Ethernet Fabric Operating System IGMP Administration Guide Part No.: E21712-02 July 2012 Copyright 2010, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This software and related documentation

More information

Dolphin CT50. Quick Start Guide. with Windows 10 IoT Mobile Enterprise. CT50-LG-W10-EN-QS Rev A 8/18

Dolphin CT50. Quick Start Guide. with Windows 10 IoT Mobile Enterprise. CT50-LG-W10-EN-QS Rev A 8/18 Dolphin CT50 with Windows 10 IoT Mobile Enterprise Quick Start Guide CT50-LG-W10-EN-QS Rev A 8/18 Out of the Box Make sure that your shipping box contains these items: Dolphin CT50 mobile computer (Models

More information

Sun Ethernet Fabric Operating System. RIP Administration Guide

Sun Ethernet Fabric Operating System. RIP Administration Guide Sun Ethernet Fabric Operating System RIP Administration Guide Part No.: E21705-03 July 2013 Copyright 2010, 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This software and related documentation

More information

Magellan RoadMate 6630T-LM GPS Navigator & HD Dash Cam Combo. Quick Start Guide

Magellan RoadMate 6630T-LM GPS Navigator & HD Dash Cam Combo. Quick Start Guide Magellan RoadMate 6630T-LM GPS Navigator & HD Dash Cam Combo Quick Start Guide Safety. This Magellan device is a GPS navigator and recording device designed to assist you in navigation, recording videos,

More information

1. Getting to know the gimbal

1. Getting to know the gimbal 1. Getting to know the gimbal Roll Motor Mounting Screw Containing Bracket Mode Button Joystick LED Light Power Button Shutter Button Thank you for choosing YI products 2. How to use the gimbal 1) Charging

More information

SLC 500 Analog I/O Modules

SLC 500 Analog I/O Modules Installation Instruction SLC 500 Analog I/O Modules (Catalog Numbers 1746-NI4, -NIO4I, -NIO4V, -NO4I, -NO4V, -FIO4I, and -FIO4V) Inside page Important User Information... 2 For More Information... 3 Types

More information

TECHNICAL REPORT RAPPORT TECHNIQUE

TECHNICAL REPORT RAPPORT TECHNIQUE TECHNICAL REPORT RAPPORT TECHNIQUE IEC/TR 62061-1 Edition 1.0 2010-07 Guidance on the application of ISO 13849-1 and IEC 62061 in the design of safety-related control systems for machinery Lignes directrices

More information

Sun Ethernet Fabric Operating System RMON Administration Guide

Sun Ethernet Fabric Operating System RMON Administration Guide Sun Ethernet Fabric Operating System RMON Administration Guide Part No: E24665-03 July 2015 Part No: E24665-03 Copyright 2010, 2015, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This software and

More information

Allen-Bradley PL. ControlLogix Drive Module. Installation Instructions. (Catalog Numbers: 1756-DMD30 and 1756-DMF30)

Allen-Bradley PL. ControlLogix Drive Module. Installation Instructions. (Catalog Numbers: 1756-DMD30 and 1756-DMF30) Installation Instructions ControlLogix Drive Module (Catalog Numbers: 1756-DMD30 and 1756-DMF30) The Drive Module mounts in a ControlLogix chassis. The ControlLogix system must be mounted within a suitable

More information

Solaris 8 6/00 Sun Hardware Roadmap

Solaris 8 6/00 Sun Hardware Roadmap Solaris 8 6/00 Sun Hardware Roadmap This document is a guide to the CDs and documents involved in installing the Solaris 8 6/00 software. Note The arrangement of CDs in the Solaris 8 product is different

More information

man pages section 6: Demos

man pages section 6: Demos man pages section 6: Demos Sun Microsystems, Inc. 4150 Network Circle Santa Clara, CA 95054 U.S.A. Part No: 816 0221 10 May 2002 Copyright 2002 Sun Microsystems, Inc. 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,

More information